User Manual

Air Interface Measurement Tool

Version 6.00

© 2011 by Anite Finland Ltd. All rights reserved. This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is intended for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Anite Finland Ltd assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this user manual. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Anite Finland Ltd. Windows®, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Outlook®, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of the Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. MapInfo® and MapX® are registered trademarks of MapInfo® Corporation. CDMA 2000® is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA -USA). The license management portion of this Licensed Technology is based on SentinelLM* © 1989-2003 Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Revision 6.00.01, Last edited July 2011

CO NTE NTS

3

CONTENTS
QUICK GUIDE
SETTING UP THE SYSTEM DATA MEASUREMENTS USING NEMO OUTDOOR Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options


9  10  11  12 

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
COPY PROTECTION Technical Support Expiration IMPORTANT End-User License Agreement Traffic Safety Operating Environment

13 
13  16  17  18  19  19 

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 20 
VOICE TESTING CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE NEMO INVEX INDOOR MEASUREMENTS 20  21  22  23  24  25  26 

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM27 
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Connecting a GPS Receiver Connecting a Scanner Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Connecting Voice Quality Devices NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING 27  28  29  29  29  30  31  32  33  38 

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

39 

CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR 39  Configuration through Welcome page 39  Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog 42  Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually 44  Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES 47 

46 

4

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

CONFIGURATION MANAGER Handler Information User Interface Notifications Scripts Base Station Files Device Configurations Devices View Groups

48  49  50  58  62  63  64  65  70 

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES 71  Measurement Properties – General 71  Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings 73  Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles 77  Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners 86  Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning 98  Measurement Properties - Script 101 

74  79 

DURING MEASUREMENTS
MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner With a Mobile MAKING VOICE CALLS Voice Call Properties Voice Call Properties – TETRA VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS MAKING VIDEO CALLS DATA TRANSFERS Configuring the Data Connection Configuring the FTP Protocol Configuring the SFTP Protocol Configuring the HTTP Protocol Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol Configuring the POP3 Protocol Configuring the SMTP Protocol Configuring the WAP Protocol Configuring the Streaming Protocol Configuring the Trace Route Protocol Making Data Transfers STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING VOIP CALLS SMS TESTING SMS Testing with CDMA terminals MMS TESTING Packet Session Settings for MMS MMS Editor

102 
103  103  103  103  104  106  107  109  112  112  117  120  122  124  125  127  130  132  133  135  135  136  138  139  139  140  141 

CO NTE NTS

5

Making MMS Measurements MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 START EXTERNAL APPLICATION ICMP PING IP PACKET CAPTURING MAKING SCRIPT FILES Script Transfer Stop Commands Add Menu Wait Settings Advanced Running Scripts MEASUREMENT LISTS FORCING FUNCTIONS Channel Locking Band Locking Handover Control Cell Barring CELL TESTING

142  142  145  148  149  151  156  158  161  162  164  168  169  171  171  173  174  179  180 

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION 181  Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile 182  Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile 184  PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS 185  UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone 186  UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements 188  CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones 188  CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners 189  GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS BAND SCAN TIMESLOT TESTING VIEWING GRAPHS Graph Popup Menu Zoom - Scatter Graph Graph Side Panel - Layers Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter Graph Layer Color Configuration 189  192  194  196  197  200  202  210  212  219 

VIEWING GRIDS 218  Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message Grid Popup Menu 219  VIEWING MAPS Map Side Panel Route Plans Map Popup Menu Color Set Editor Map Example 1 Map Example 2 246  248  250  255  273  275  276 

6

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Map Example 3 Map Example 4 Map Example 5 VIEWING FLOORPLANS Multiple Routes and Floorplans Indoor Route Planning Indoor Map Popup Menu

277  278  279  281  282  283  285 

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT REPORT

293 
294 

MEASUREMENT RESULTS
ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Selecting Playback Files During Playback Viewing and Moving Markers Closing Playback Files

296 
296  296  296  297  298  299 

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER299 

USER INTERFACE
VIEW GROUPS MENU BAR TOOLBAR STATUS BAR NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Measurement Menu Playback Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS Custom Windows Parameter Tree Search Functionality Devices View Device Status View Output Window Script Status Window Controlling Windows

302 
302  303  303  303  304  304  305  305  306  308  308  310  310  311  315  315  316  317  319  321  321  321  322 

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW

TROUBLESHOOTING
LOW THROUGHPUT All Windows Versions

324 
324  325 

CO NTE NTS

7

Windows XP Windows Vista/Windows7 DEVICE STATUS VIEW CANNOT ADD DEVICES CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION

326  326  328  328  329  329  329 

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS
TOOLBAR BUTTONS DIALOG BUTTONS GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS

330 
330  331  332  333 

SHORTCUT KEYS NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT
INTERNET SUPPORT USER CLUB PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT

336  337  340 
340  340  340 

APPENDIX 1
INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD

342 
342 

APPENDIX 2 APPENDIX 3
MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW
®

343  345 
345  345 

CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET344 

APPENDIX 4 APPENDIX 5
NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Common Components Optional components MMAC3 WITH CASE Lid Carrying case MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION Without Carrying Case With Carrying Case

347  351 
351  352  352  356  357  357  359  360  364  364  366 

CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR347 

8

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

APPENDIX 6
NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components Setting Up the System Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi

372 
372  372  375  379  385 

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE 386 
VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line Mobile-to-Mobile 389  389  390  390 

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ) Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing 390  Disassembling the EVOQ Module 411  Assembling the EVOQ Module 412  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD 412  Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data 412  Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP 413  Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card

420  431 

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 430  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications 431  Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver 433 

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 436  MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements 438  438  444 

APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES 450 
PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings Antivirus Filtering Low Data Throughputs 450  450  450  450 

APPENDIX 10
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

455 
455 

Q UI CK G UI DE

9

QUICK GUIDE
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM
 From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onwards the software is protected with a copy protection module and it is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based copy protection licenses are no longer valid. 1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (p.27). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo Outdoor 5.xx.xx.exe from the Nemo Outdoor CDROM. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup. 2. During the installation, Nemo Outdoor will ask you to insert the copy protection module on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor (p.13). Please insert the copy protection module and wait until Windows has completed installing the device drivers. Press OK to continue the setup. 3. When the installation is finished, restart the computer. 4. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computer’s COM and/or USB ports. If you are using a laptop, you will probably need a PCMCIA card or a USB serial converter to create additional COM ports. Install the PCMCIA card or USB serial converter and the required driver (p.342). Connect the devices to the COM ports with the specified cables and switch the devices on. Especially with GPRS mobiles that have two cables, be sure to use the correct cable. 5. If you are making a data measurement, you need to create a dial-up connection. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.  Choose one of the following steps: Select step 5 if you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. Go to step 6 if you are an older user of Nemo Outdoor and would like to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. Go to step 7 if you would like to set up the system manually. 6. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM port and dial-up information to them. 7. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see p.42).

If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode. 12. and password) are operator-specific. Open the Measurement Properties. 10.128). GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from the list. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the work offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. When you want to activate the devices. browse the folder where map files are stored. You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map.nbf). browse the default map file (p. scanner. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.48) to add measurement devices manually.114). In the Device Properties dialog. For circuit-switched data measurements. select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. you can go to Measurement | Add New Device. select the correct COM ports and click OK. 9. Click OK. If you have base station files (. and browse a file in the BTS File field. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. In the Default map field. Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) (p. Select the device type (phone. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. When you want to view a BTS file on a map. Alternatively. you can also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices.  Setting up data measurements: 1. In addition. . Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. double-click the Packet Session item to define Packet Session Settings (p. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p. select a device and configure it for measurements. In the Map field. If you are using a GPS receiver. for example.73). for example.66). Click Next.10 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 8. without connecting and starting the measurement devices. C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. Use the Windows® Explorer to copy all the required map files to the maps folder. which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection. Select the Device item and click the Add button . double-click the Circuit-Switched Data Call item to define Data Call Properties (p. Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a Dial-Up Connection. you will also need a map. that is. 11. 2. select a premade device configuration and click Start Devices. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline. close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. Define the default map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog. Measurement settings dialog (p. open the Measurement Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used. username. copy them to the BTS files folder. You can go to File | Open Measurement. For packet-switched data calls. or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode. DATA MEASUREMENTS   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. C:\Nemo Tools\maps. and select a saved measurement for playback. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. double-click the User Interface item and select the Paths tab.55).

double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p. or Streaming (p. USING NEMO OUTDOOR When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window. 5. POP3 (p.135) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. 58). Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button .131). TCP/UDP (Iperf) (p. Click OK. etc.133). ICMP Ping (p. Trace Route (p. Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that contains some predefined views (graphs. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. WAP (p.138). the device is connected properly and is ready for measurements. To perform measurements manually. Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog. 7. You can playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Then define properties for the selected data protocol by double-clicking the respective item under Supported Data Protocols: Browsing (p. . To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). grids.139). To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (p. maps. open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement.118).149).123). 2. Click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. SMTP (p.296). 4. double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p. 6. Nemo Outdoor will start the recording automatically.125).149). If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement. You can now start data measurements. 5. start voice call or send MMS message. You can use Scripts (p. Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button. use the Notifications function (p. SFTP (p. During playback use the Pause button to freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that particular point in time.Q UI CK G UI DE 11 3. You can also open and close windows during the playback (p. 7. HTTP (p.128). 4. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button . To finish both the recording and the script. Select a data protocol in the Selected Data Protocol field. click the button again. such as. click the Stop button . 121). Click the Start Playback button to playback a file. Click the Rename button to change the file name. 6. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements).134). FTP (p. 1. 3. First.). select the appropriate actions. To stop running the script. 115).126). from the Measurement control menu.

or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target field.wor /H N95.wor workspace. the following command line  Outdoor5 /W test.hwc hardware configuration. in which the user is not able to save any changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace. N95. . and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect.    /W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor /H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor /M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode. load the test.12 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options Outdoor supports the following command-line options. These command lines will enable the user to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd.hwc /M SIMPLE will start Nemo Outdoor. Hence.

only hardware-based copy protection is used. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze for Windows®. please contact Nemo Technical Support at Nemo. If you have problems starting Nemo Outdoor.1900 MHz CDMA2000 1xEV-DO AMPS DVB-H EGPRS GSM 850. COPY PROTECTION From Nemo Outdoor 5. 1900 MHz GPRS HSDPA HSUPA HSPA+ LTE TD-SCDMA TETRA iDEN UMTS (FDD mode) WiMAX Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. 900. verification. 1800. A USB copy protection dongle will be delivered in the Nemo Outdoor package.8 onward. A new dongle with a valid technical support and maintenance agreement option will be in use with Nemo Outdoor 5. Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard disk.com. For a complete list of supported devices. and maintenance purposes. Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. .BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 13 BEFORE YOU BEGIN This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool Software for Windows® XP Professional and Windows® 7 developed by Anite Finland Ltd. Plug in the copy protection dongle in a USB port on your PC. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization.Helpdesk@anite. 800. see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet.  Note that the new dongle introduced in Nemo Outdoor 5. The supported network standards are: cdmaOne 450.80 and later versions.80 will not be backwards compatible with the older versions of Nemo Outdoor. and if the following error messages appear.

it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5. or it can alternatively be downloaded from Nemo User Club. Before updating Nemo Outdoor application please make sure that new dongle key is available. either the dongle key is not plugged in or the dongle key is an unsupported model. Note that you must use the latest version of the software which comes with Nemo Outdoor version 5. e. but that the dongle key is missing valid technical support & maintenance agreement information.80. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the dongle key without information about the technical support agreement. The old dongle key The new dongle key The dongles are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the old dongle key. it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5. . After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version. Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key with the Remote Update Utility.80. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo Outdoor dongle.4. The example above is seen.g. No Valid Technical Support Agreement If the error message below appears. Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key. when the SPS 00868 dongle key is in use. it means that the dongle key type is correct.” appears when the application is started.14 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual No Valid License Detected If the error message “Error: No valid license detected….

80 and later) 1. . Send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support at nemo.helpdesk@anite. 5. 2. Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject “Nemo Outdoor dongle update”:         Company name First name Surname Street address Zip/ Postal Code Country Telephone number Mobile number 6. Click Collect Information and select a location where the C2V file is saved. The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 15  Updating the dongle (Nemo Outdoor version 5. 3.com. After you have received the V2C file containing the update. Connect your copy protection module 4. Start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo Tools | Remote Update Utility. select the Update File in the Apply License Update tab and click Apply Update.

16 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. The dongle is now updated. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2012 cannot be used with the dongle key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 and later versions include a compulsory technical support and maintenance agreement option. The customer is entitled for free updates until April 2012. Nemo Outdoor can be installed and is ready for use. After the technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed. Technical Support Expiration The new dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor 5. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor application.80 with a 1-year technical support maintenance agreement in April 2011. the dongle key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application to the latest version. . The technical support expiration date defines the date the agreement ends.

right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items. you need to start Nemo Outdoor by right-clicking the icon and selecting Run as administrator. . Go to Control Panel | Power Options. Go to Device Manager.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 17 IMPORTANT  Please note that when you are Running Nemo Outdoor on Windows 7. you need to set the power management options of the laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor. Also. Select the High performance power plan. Open the Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power option is deselected. expand the Universal Serial Bus controllers item. check the generic USB hub properties.

When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use. the battery operation time is reduced from normal use. After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile into normal use. .18 Nemo O ut door User M a nual The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind wireless technologies. Use only the supplied connecting cable. TM7200. For full details of this agreement. see Appendix 8 on page 450. With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description or the compatibility list in the user manual for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite Finland. MSM6800. Especially note at this time that Anite Finland does not recommend using Toshiba laptop computers with Nemo Outdoor. With Nokia GSM. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor system is running. The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000. and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated. Otherwise. the mobile can dial a wrong number. In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels. it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor triggered events in the mobile. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite Finland does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. MSM6500. included with the Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 386. This is due to certain incompatibilities that may cause the USB port not working as desired. TM6275. TM6250. End-User License Agreement The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that agreement. TM6275US. TM6200. and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been verified by Anite Finland. Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of the mobile. for connecting the Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computer’s serial port. GPRS.

Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger. It may interfere with nearby electronic devices. fuel depots. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations. including its warnings. traffic safety comes first. Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 19 Traffic Safety Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Remember. Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. Finland assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation. . chemical plants. Operating Environment Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual. or sites where blasting operations are in progress. for the devices used by Nemo Outdoor.

a GPS receiver. The package also includes the necessary connecting cables. provided by Anite Finland with all the software installed) with the Windows® XP Professional or Windows® Vista operating system.20 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW VOICE TESTING The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user provided or. serial or USB port adapters. . Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available. and fast frequency scanners if applicable. optionally.

as well as certain parameters. and a dial-up server. which in turn define the desired transfer rate. in the Receive mode vice versa. the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. . The dial-up server is used to establish a data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. During the measurement. Trace route testing and RTSP (video streaming). Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP. In the Send mode. the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 21 CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo Outdoor). If you are using a FTP server. the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. HTTP. IPerf for UDP/TCP. The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes. the measurement unit can only receive files. CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support circuit-switched data. Ping. SMTP. an application server. SFTP. If you are using an HTTP server. POP3. such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.

IPerf for UDP/TCP. If you are using an HTTP server. Trace route testing. . POP3. If you are using an FTP server. as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots. SMTP. in the Receive mode vice versa. It is a Linuxbased administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. SFTP. During the measurement. Ping. In the Send mode. and RTSP (video streaming). the measurement unit can only receive files. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers.22 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and an application server. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP. PS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data. the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. HTTP.

With the professional high-quality lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. and different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers. WCDMA. but also long-term network performance measurements. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 23 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. EDGE. .e. Nemo Outdoor Multi-Data makes it easy to carry out. The Multi-Data functionality in Nemo Outdoor allows up to five concurrent data measurements to be performed simultaneously while the system is connected to a single laptop. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. CDMA2000. The system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows benchmarking measurements to be performed on different system technologies such as GSM. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a car’s +12VDC power output. preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. and WiMAX. scanners. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system. i. up to five test mobiles. HSDPA. and a GPS device. not only casual data benchmarking test cases that can be used to compare the performance of different technologies or operators. Nemo Outdoor Multi supports a total of seven test devices. Combined with Nemo Server. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional tough roll-around carrying case.

24 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. a scanner and a sound card. The system is connected to a single laptop. In addition. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/data cards. voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system. .

low data rates can be seen without a cause identified. Quick and easy to deploy. . Nemo Invex provides critical quality-of-service (QoS) measurements and a wide variety of quality-ofexperience (QoE) service testing. With other benchmarking tools QoS statistics can be collected but no actual reasons for possible issues. such as. Nemo Invex is flexible and scalable. Nemo Analyze. including the latest voice and video quality measurement algorithms. These enhanced capabilities help to save time and money and provide additional value added information also to benchmarking campaigns. The Nemo Outdoor software application that runs on the Nemo Invex 4G chassis for benchmarking is also widely known as a tool for network optimization. Often the network issue is interference and other benchmarking tools are collecting quality parameters but no real time analysis is performed. Furthermore. capable of evolving as the network evolves providing the lowest effective total cost of ownership available. The Nemo solutions allow the user to activate different interference analysis measurements. WCDMA pilot pollution. GSM cochannel/ adjacent channel interference and GSM/ WCDMA missing neighbor detection.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 25 NEMO INVEX Nemo Invex® system combines powerful intuitive software and scalable military grade hardware design to create superior drive-test systems for wireless networks. significant cost savings can be realized by bundling the data collection solution with a post-processing solution as Anite has a comprehensive postprocessing solution. such as.

Just click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. Alternatively normal laptop can be used as well. . You can use floorplans as maps.26 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual INDOOR MEASUREMENTS Nemo Outdoor has an indoor measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a Tablet PC. the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. As GPS receivers cannot be used indoors.

26GHz or higher required 100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 342 for more information. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS                 PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP (32. one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per scanner One serial port for each voice quality audio module or one USB port per sound card One USB port for an external GPS receiver Display resolution 1024 x 768 with 256 colors.0 or higher for viewing the help file If your computer does not have enough serial ports. 1GB RAM recommended For multi data measurements with HSPA+ devices Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. Pentium III processor. do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your computer. that is. 1 GB recommended One USB port for copy protection module One USB port per mobile Depending on the scanner used.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. preferably 1.00GHz or higher required For voice quality measurements with up to four channels with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. 1280 x 1024 recommended Internet Explorer 4. Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 27 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices.bit) Professional or Windows 7 ® Professional (32-/64-bit). minimum 1GHz.26GHz or higher required 512MB RAM minimum.7 GHz for single mobile measurements For multi data measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. Use the Nemo Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor. .

6720US.. C5-03. N85US. N96US. or 3500 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Nokia C5.   External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted GPS receiver: (optional. following types are supported)          Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Garmin V Garmin 18 USB Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output DKU-2 USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:    Nokia 6230i Nokia 6630 Nokia 6680  DKU-2 or CA-53 cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:    Nokia N80 Nokia 6136 Nokia N92  DKE-2 or mini USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:  Nokia 7376       Datang DTM8101 or DTM8120 mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4. N97 and N97US mobile with the micro USB cable and a free USB port Motorola V3X. 6720. 6120.010 data cable and a free USB port Nokia N75 mobile with the DKE-2 or the DKU-2 connectivity cable and a free USB port Nokia N95. from cigarette lighter plug).010 data cable and a free USB port Leadcore LC8310E mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4. V9 or V9US mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port . N95 US.370.g. 6121. Please note that the scanning receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e. C7-00.28 Nemo O ut door User M a nual OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor.370. N85. N96.

follow the instructions on your screen. C680. NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button.g. NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION  To install the Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software: 1. if applicable. Connecting a GPS Receiver  To connect the serial GPS receiver: 1. Z107. if applicable. TM6275US or TM7200 mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port LG U800 or KU950 mobile with a mini USB cable and a free USB port LG KX260. Connect the cable of the GPS antenna unit to the GPS receiver.. 2. or A707 mobile with the PCB200BBE USB cable and a free USB port Qualcomm CDMA2000 Compatible. Z500. Select Start | Run in the Windows® Status bar. TM6200. C676. and LHD-200E mobile with a LG VX6100/VX7000. Switch on the GPS receiver.  Note that for Windows® XP and Windows® Vista. you will need to restart the computer. 4. Start Windows® and insert the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM in your CD drive (e. ZV10. KQ-U8A cable and a free USB port Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software is protected with a copy protection dongle. if applicable. Z140. 5. 6. Plug the other end of the cable into the GPS receiver. drive D). installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account with administrative privileges.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 29         Huawei C7600 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung SGH-Z105. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete. Connect the power cable to the GPS receiver (see the GPS receiver manual). instructions for devices that require a dial-up connection can be found in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor 5\Nemo Outdoor x. 2. When the Installation program starts. MSM6800 Compatible. TM6250. However. TM6275. Plug the GPS data cable into a free serial port on your computer. select Device and click the Add button . See page 13 for more information about copy protection. or P920mobile with the PCB157ULE USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z560 or ZX20 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z720. 3. MSM6500 Compatible.xx. . Start Nemo Outdoor. C270. Open the Configuration Manager. 3.

Click on GPS. . Click OK. Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. Click OK. 4. For a list of necessary hardware. 2. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table: Navigator Type Garmin 18 USB Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 6. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 342 for more information. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table: Navigator Type Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Trimble Placer GPS 450/455 Baud rate 4800 4800 4800 4800 9600 Data bits 8 8 8 8 8 Parity None None None None None Stop bits 1 1 1 1 1 9. 8.  To connect the USB GPS receiver: 1. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. select Device and click the Add button . 3. Open the Configuration Manager. follow these instructions in order to connect the scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Select the serial port to which your GPS receiver is connected. refer to page 28. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. Start Nemo Outdoor.30 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7.  If your computer does not have enough serial ports. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer. the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. 5. If an external fast frequency scanner for a computer’s serial port is used. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. Connecting a Scanner See the Nemo Scanner Guide for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor.

The graph below depicts the system when it is purchased without the carrying case. See page 351 for further information on how to set up the system.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 31 Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Below you will see the two different options as of Nemo Outdoor Multi system that. .

32 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The graph below displays the system as when purchased with the carrying case. Connecting Voice Quality Devices Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide on page 372 for complete installation and configuration instructions. .

select the server and click Connect. click Close. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Outdoor will try to connect to the server. you can connect the measurement servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. click the Add button and select Add Measurement Server Name. Select Add | Autodetect Measurement Servers to find all measurement servers connected to the system. Start Nemo Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 33 NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured. A list of available measurement servers is displayed. Click the Measurement servers button in the Devices view. If a measurement server is missing from the list. . Enter the server name (IP address) and click OK. The State will change to Connected. To connect to a measurement server. Finally.

The Local item refers to devices connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. if you have two data-enabled devices connected to the same measurement server.  Please note that one measurement server supports only one data-enabled device at a time. define whether the device will be used for voice or voice and data measurements. In the Mode column. In other words. .34 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. you must use one of them in Voice mode. Click the Autodetect button to detect devices connected to the measurement servers.

to group the devices by type (phone or scanner) or . Click the Group devices by type/server button by server. this may take a few minutes. The devices will be added to Nemo Outdoor. Depending on the number of devices.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 35 If you are adding a scanner. click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration supported by the scanner. Finally click Add Devices.

. you can change how the devices are organized. By resizing the view.36 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Device Status view displays all the connected devices and their status.

It is possible to save the hardware configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As. This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor. Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 37 Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view. .

 = 33 cm 1800 MHz. click the Measurement servers button. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz. Check that connectors are properly connected. cables.38 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual To disconnect measurement servers. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable. . and two wavelengths from each other.  = 16 cm GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz.  Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength. DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. If antennas are too close to each other.  = 19 cm Check the configuration before starting the measurement. it may cause interference. select a measurement server and click Disconnect. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows.  = 17 cm 1900 MHz. When removing antennas after a drive test. no slashes or cuts. Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. and connectors: there should be no tight curves. GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING Check the condition of all antennas.  = 66 cm 900 MHz.

and also helps more advanced users to add new devices.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 39 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS After you have installed Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. 2. . and more advanced users may want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually. you will need to configure the system for your environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. With the Automatic device detection functionality. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo Outdoor. select the Do not show this again option. Older users of Nemo Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. It appears on the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. This functionality automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information.  Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB cable. Configuration through Welcome page 1. and matches a dialup connection with the assigned modem port for the device. CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-down menu. Furthermore. you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. The following instructions will help you in this initial configuration. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-time user.

You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog. In addition. 3. start them in offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button. This is useful. The COM ports are created with the dial-up connection. . Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device may also require additional configurations in its modem settings. when you accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.g.. you may need to create a dial-up connection for the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below. or refresh the device configuration by clicking the Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window.40 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. 4. e.

The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 41 5. you can configure the devices manually and activate them. This includes the dial-up connection and the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. that is. 7. 6. When you want to activate the devices. select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the measurement. . If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline. If you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode. without connecting and starting the measurement devices. select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. If you want. Click Load Selected Files. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

1. go to step 4. select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. . If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode.42 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog To view the Load Device Configuration dialog. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace. click Other… in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window. 2.

Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6280 .CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 43 3. If license do not cover e. or GPS receiver from the list and click Next. When you want to activate the devices. select Empty Device Configuration and click Start Devices. In the Load Device Configuration dialog. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears. For example. MDM7200 (HSUPA) and HSPA+ trace messages are not activated. device is added to Nemo Outdoor application with an other chipset support e. that is. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.g. select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM7200 .g. The following Qualcomm chipsets are supported:        Qualcomm TM6200 Qualcomm TM6250 Qualcomm TM6275 . if device supports MDM8200 chipset (HSPA+) these trace messages are automatically activated.Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ devices . scanner. Choose the appropriate phone. 4. Before trace message activation application is checking is the licence valid for such a device.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6275 US . MDM8200 devices (HSPA+ devices). without connecting and starting the measurement devices. 6. Nemo Outdoor application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly.Compatible with Qualcomm HSUPA devices Qualcomm TM8200 . Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device or by clicking the Add or remove devices button in the Devices view. 5. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler.

Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ dual carrier devices Qualcomm MDM9200 . In addition. Select the devices you want to add. . or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. and click the Add Devices tab at the bottom of the Autodetect Devices dialog. you can go to Measurement | Add New Device. Click the Autodetect Devices button in the toolbar. close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. and select a saved measurement for playback. Alternatively. You can go to File | Open Measurement. 8. Select Add Devices in Specific Order to select the order of the added devices. you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection for network measurements. Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually.44 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual    Qualcomm TM8220 . Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. select a device and configure it for measurements.Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices 7. A dialog with a list of previously added devices and their dial-up connection appears. You can now start the measurements.Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices Qualcomm MDM9600 . Click on Measurement Properties in the Phone/Scanner Properties dialog to enter the Measurement Properties dialog. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. Set the appropriate values. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices. 9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (alt+M) to open the User Interface Properties dialog. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 45 In the Add Devices dialog you can select a device and move it up or down in the list to define the device order with the arrow buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog. . Click Add Devices to add the devices to Nemo Outdoor.

select the Start recording automatically when devices are started option. . On the General page. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically when devices are connected and started. Go to View | User Interface Properties. 2. perform the following configurations. In the Nemo Outdoor main view.46 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Use Case 1. 1.

measurements will start automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected. 5. To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for PS data testing purposes. Click OK. when carrying out measurements. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor. However. CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES The Phone Settings of the Nemo Outdoor test mobile can be user defined. 6. and File | Save Device Configuration As.  Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger. 4. the PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 47 3. if possible. Please consult the mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile. Close Nemo Outdoor. On the Measurement page select Yes in the Start scripts automatically field. Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As. Net Monitoring must be switched off with the Nokia mobiles listed below:  Nokia 6230i . see the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland.

The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. can be configured. Double-clicking on the Measurement Properties item leads to the User Interface Properties | Measurement view on page 52. The default System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor. You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager toolbar button . All these items. except System Properties and Handler Information.48 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager. . Select an item from the list and click the Properties button .

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 49 Handler Information Under Handler Information. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. you must have the corresponding handler installed. you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer. and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor. . Each device has its own handler.

50

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Interface

Under the User Interface item, you will find several items: User Interface Properties, Custom Windows, Notifications, Scripts, Color Palettes, Color Sets, and Presentation Modes. The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see page 57). Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further information on how to create color sets, see page 273. You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see page 56). Double-click on the User Interface Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

51

User Interface Properties – General

Buffer Size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement. Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened the next time you start the SW. Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline mode to online mode. Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls after the measurement is ended. Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message when the measurement has been paused. Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing. Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the Script Status window when script files are used in measurements. Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in audio quality measurements also during playback.

52

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed. With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording. Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button. When the Show ‘Enable Missing Neighbor Query’ dialog when recording is started option is selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled. With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a debug file wil be generated when Nemo Outdoor is closed. Please note that you need to run Nemo Outdoor as Administrator.

User Interface Properties – Measurement
By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting all measurements.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

53

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. %a %A %b %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366) Month as decimal number (01 – 12) Minute as decimal number (00 – 59) Sequence number (1 – ) Sequence number (1 – ) Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 – 59) Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53) Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99) Year with century, as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script file when you click the Start Recording button in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state when toggling a script on and off. Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop recording after the script is finished.

54

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before repeating the scripts. With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time. Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring only after there is a GPS fix. Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed. Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from the device when the device is started. When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call. With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and disable routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification should be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi data testing, it can cause problems when several dial-up connections are opened from one host computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all dial-up connections are routed via one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

55

User Interface Properties – Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the default values. To change the default paths, click on the … button and browse for a new location. In the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file is provided by Anite Finland in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see page 273. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.  Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

56

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Interface Properties – Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

57

User Interface Properties – Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes. To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

58

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default. By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to, for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

select the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window and double-click any notification to open the Notifications dialog. In the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 59 Notification Configuration To make your own notifications.wav) to the notifications. If you want to attach your own sound files (. Browse a sound file in the field or use the default file. Browse a bitmap file in the field or use the default file. Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. The dialog displays all existing notifications. . The button will display a preview of the selected image. Alternatively select View | Notification Manager. Use the Play button to listen to the file. define which one you would like to use (see page 55). Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. you should create the files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\ Nemo Shared Files \Images. Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. From the table you can see the notification title and the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. you should create the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female. If you want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

You can add several criteria for each notification. The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you can activate the notification for a specific device.60 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog. Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain events only once. Title defines a name for the notification. Then define the Condition and Value for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. . Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification. Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to open the dialog.

you can select and clear all items in the list. Select the notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK. 3. Notifications dialog. In the Notification Criteria dialog. Define sound and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table. 4. select the notification that you just created. 2. This will open the Measurement Properties. define the notification criteria and click OK. click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view. Click OK to save the settings. In the Notifications dialog. By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons.  To make user-configurable notifications: 1.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 61 To activate a notification for a particular device. Open the Notifications dialog (View | Notification Manager) and click Add. The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. . The Notification Properties button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings (see page 59 for more information).

Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts.62 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Scripts  Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. Creating Script files is described in more detail on page 156. . Select the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Scripts can be used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement.

.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 63 Base Station Files Under the Base Station Files item you will find loaded base station files. Select a BTS file to view the BTS information in the Configuration Manager view. Click the – button to remove the BTS file.

hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager. The new .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively. . To rename a device configuration. you will find a list of device configuration files (. A device configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. Device Configurations folder.64 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Device Configurations Under Device Configurations.hwc). To make new device configurations. you can load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration dialog. You can use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor. When everything is ready. double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog. add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure them. You can load a . select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the saved file.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 65 Devices Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. GPS. and remove a device by selecting the device and clicking on the minus icon . These dialogs are presented next. Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon . Double-clicking on the device will open the applicable device properties dialog. Each device (mobile. . and scanner) has its own properties dialog.

See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. and makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. Please refer to the Dial-up Networking Setup Guide for more detailed information. Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. select a dial-up connection here. Packet switched dial-op connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. . See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. select a dial-up connection here. and the information is also stored in the log file header.66 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Phone Properties The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone. If you are making CS data measurements. Circuit switched dial-up connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements.

Antenna type 1140.27 Frequency range 824– 894/1710– 1880/ 1850–2170 MHz 1140. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2. click OK.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 67 Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2. or Smarteq.5 m. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings.26 890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. You can also enter the Measurement Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu bar. leave these values blank. To exit the dialog. . After you have configured the device.55/ 0. SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu. Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements. SMA male The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers. Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu.5 m. you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly.

leave these values blank. a name or a usage purpose. . Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see page 70).55/ 0. Antenna type 1140.26 890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas.68 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Scanner Properties In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2. SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq.5 m.5 m. or Smarteq. Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. and the information is also stored in the log file header. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers. you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. SMA male The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0. Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2.27 Frequency range 824– 894/1710– 1880/ 1850–2170 MHz 1140. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone. for example.

click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. a name or a usage purpose. and the information is also stored in the log file header. click OK. the options for Parity are Even. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. 2400. The available values are 1200. .CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 69 After you have configured the device. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values for Data bits are 5. None. Check your GPS receiver documentation. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. and Odd. To exit the dialog. and 9600. making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. 6. After you have configured the device. Data bits. The default value for Stop bits is 1. for example. To exit the dialog. and 8. 4800. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. click OK. GPS Properties In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device. Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected. 7.

the right-hand panel displays the views that are saved in the view group. See page 302 for more information on using the view groups. When you select a view group in the Configuration Manager. You can add a new view group from the plus icon .70 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual View Groups Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name. View groups are sets of windows that are open at the same time. and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon . .

Note that you should enter the name yourself. If you have a GPS receiver connected to the system. . The network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been monitoring. on the device model.nbf). BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 71 MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device type (mobile or scanner). and on the technologies supported by the device. Measurement Properties – General Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. Click the … button to browse for a BTS file (.

This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.72 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By clicking the Advanced button. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. Here you can enable and disable various measurement options such as layer messages. A separate . The selection depends on the measurement device used. you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. the disabled messages will not be recorded in the measurement file.  . To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the device.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. the internal GPS receiver should be activated. Please note that when measuring with a LX GSM/WCDMA scanner in a WCDMA network. This will decrease output file size.   Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. If you disable some of the options.

See page 104 for more information. Clicking the field of a selected data protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol. See page113 for more information. DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice call. Clicking the Supported Data Protocols field opens a list of supported data protocols. Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings. Selected Data Protocol defines which data protocol is used to perform data transfers. Short Messaging Service button opens the SMS Testing dialog. See page 138 for more information on SMS testing. Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog. Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See page 139 for more information on MMS testing. when selected. See page 114 for more in formation. MMS dialog. See page 136 for more information. The Measurement Settings page of the Measurement Properties dialog is available for mobiles only. Packet Session opens the Packet Session Settings dialog.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 73 Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings You are able to make measurement type specific configurations by clicking the corresponding field in the dialog. Voice Call opens the Voice Call Properties dialog. Enable VoIP Measurements option. See page 109 for more information. opens the SIP server and VoIP call dialogs. .

The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM.74 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles  Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports frequency scanning. GSM900 and GSM1800. .g. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. in a grid view. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. for example. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. With TopN scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. for EGSM. Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile. You can view the missing neighbor information. e.

You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove.. To select all available channels for scanning. To remove channels from the Selected list. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel..CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 75 If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection. . The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . click the Select Channels button to define the channels to be scanned. If all bands are selected. To remove all channels.. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. click the Remove All button. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . click the Add All button. Select one band from the list or all of them..items from current band. Alternatively. click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. To add channels to the Selected list. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. items from every band.

In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the Top-N field. . The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32.76 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual If you select the Top-N option. You can click on the Clear all button to clear the table. click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.

The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. for example.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 77 Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles  Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports pilot scanning. You can view the missing neighbor information. The device will only report cells with CPICH RSCP above the set value. . Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. in a grid view. Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS.

An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu.. Click OK to exit the dialog. Alternatively.. If all bands are selected. .items from current band. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. channels from all bands will be viewed. To select all available channels for scanning. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . click the Add All button.. To add channels to the Selected list..78 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the Available view. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. items from every band.

of the number of samples. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30 kHz narrow. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. . The contents of the sub-pages are technology-specific. Frequency Scanning with GSM Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 79 Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners The Frequency scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. in dB. Channel style defines the style of the measured channel.

Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can be decoded from BCCH messages. Mobile Network Code. Cell information decoding. Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has been purchased with the scanner. click the Add All button. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. To select all available channels for scanning. By clicking the Select Channels button. When the System information decoding option is selected. you can access a dialog where you select the channels that will be scanned. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. .80 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. L3 messages are written in the log file. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. Click on a channel in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. First select the Band. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.

in dB. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the C TRL key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. By clicking the Select Channels button. . Click OK to exit the dialog. click the Remove All button. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 81 To remove channels from the Selected list. To remove all channels.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Frequency Scanning with UMTS Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80). of the number of samples. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. By clicking the Select Channels button. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80). . Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. of the number of samples. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. in dB. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result.82 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frequency Scanning with LTE Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. By clicking the Select Channels button. . Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. in dB.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 83 Frequency Scanning with CDMA/EV-DO Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. of the number of samples. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample.

Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. . you can access the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80). Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. in dB. By clicking the Select Frequencies button.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. of the number of samples.84 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frequency Scanning with WiMAX Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.

of the number of samples. By clicking the Select Channels button. in dB. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 85 Frequency Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. . Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level.

Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. the pilots are not reported. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. In aggregate method. The contents of the sub-pages are technologyspecific. Pilot Scanning with UMTS Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No.86 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners The Pilot scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. If the values are below the threshold. . value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated.

Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 87 Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. for example. Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. In high speed mode. Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling code. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the log file for both GSM and WCDMA. weak pilots may be undetected. L3 messages are written in the log file. . When the System information decoding option is selected. You can view the missing neighbor information. Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB).   In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner. Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement. If enabled. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. in a grid view. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. Selective level determines a valid path. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor (average value). The Channel number field provides a list of channels that can be selected for scanning. S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code.

. In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and consequently speed up the search. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. Channelization code specifies the channelization code.88 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. If you press the arrow.  Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners only. a drop-down menu will appear from where you can select Top-N Search Configuration. Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel) searches with P-CPICH. Search method defines how the search is performed.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 89 Pilot Scanning with LTE Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. the scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type. If enabled. In aggregate method. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. . Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. 1:2. 1:4 and 1:8. Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to notify you of. The available options are 1:1. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. scanner will report results from N best cells. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). With Autodetect selected. Please note that this option is not available with PCTEL EX LTE scanners. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID.

The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. In the LTE Channel Specific Settings dialog. “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS. Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure.  Note that the available options are device specific. Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 30720  Ts  1 ms . When you select LTE channels. for each subframe in a radio frame. GP and UpPTS. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time.. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning.90 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD.e. Carrier refers to either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type. . The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below where. you can also define some channel-specific settings. select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the settings. i. “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions. Each radio frame of length Tf  307200  Ts  10 ms consists of two half-frames of length 153600 Ts  5 ms each. primary and secondary signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set. Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel. Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the interference and noise from the same reference signal set.

153600 Ts = 5 ms One slot. T f = 307200 T s = 10 ms One half -frame. . 30720 Ts DwPTS 30720T s Subframe #2 Subframe #3 Subframe #4 Subframe #5 Subframe #7 Subframe #8 Subframe #9 GP UpPT S D wPTS GP UpPT S Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity): Uplink-downlink configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D Pilot Scanning with EV-DO Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. T slot=15360 Ts Subframe #0 One subframe .CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 91 One radio frame .

and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. when selected. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. If the values are below the threshold. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. the pilots are not scanned.92 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Channel style refers to the style of the channel. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. 1:2. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. The available options are 1:1. It is reported in chips. If enabled. Overhead message decoding. For Pilot window search mode the options are Standard. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. 1:4 and 1:8. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. The sensitivity will not be affected but the scanning speed will be slower as the search window is increased. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. Wide and Very Wide. In aggregate method. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. . Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. The Wide and Very Wide options can be used to detect pilots far away from the base stations.

If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). In aggregate method. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. If the values are below the threshold. For example. . Chip window size defines the length of pilot window in chips from 1 to 64. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Bigger correlator size enables the scanner to detect and measure Pilot channels with better dynamic but makes scanning speed slower. This value is used to establish the number of chips to be searched for pilot across (Pilot Window Length) and to define the position of these chips Pilot Window Mode in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). Correlator affects how the scanner works. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 93 Pilot Scanning with CDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. the dynamic range for pilot measurement changes from –21db to –17db. the pilots are not scanned. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. when using correlator size 2048 versus 512.

94 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. scanner will report results from N best preambles. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. when selected. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Pilot Scanning with WiMAX Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. . Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. It is reported in chips. If enabled. Overhead message decoding. scanner will report results from N best pilots. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. In aggregate method. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode.

and the CINRs are calculated only from the same segment. -16. in dB *100 (e. . whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment.g. measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning. Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. Each sample corresponds to 89.g.34). As a broad guideline. 1 and 2). Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired balance between the interference and the network coverage. When Reuse Factor 3 is selected.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 95 CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value.285 nanoseconds. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific. only the contribution of the desired segment is considered. a downlink signal on segment 0 will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement. The values range from 0 to 1023+32. The WiMAX air interface modulating waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0. The allocation of frequency sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e. It is based on the requested reuse factor.. so that the CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters.

the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate method. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. . With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. The available options are 1:1.96 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Pilot Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. If enabled. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. 1:4 and 1:8. scanner will report results from N best pilots. 1:2. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

Pilot Scanning with DVB-H Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Frequency defines the frequency scanned.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 97 The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning. . The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific.

. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click Add. hence slightly decreasing background noise.98 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning In the Spectrum scanning page you can define frequencies that will be scanned. Use preamplifier option should be selected if the signal level is less than -50 dB. However. it is recommended that it is not selected when signal volume is higher than -50dBm. This will increase the scanner sensitivity.

To create new scanning sets. define the scanning frequencies at the top of the dialog. you can either select to add the frequencies to the scanning list or save them as a predefined set. You can define Predefined scanning sets which you can use to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned. If you manually define the start and stop frequencies. Define the center frequency and the bandwidth. you can either select to add them to the scanning list. Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. press the Add to Scanning List button and select Save as Predefined Set. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. or save them as a predefined set. Sample count determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 99 Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the start and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. . Just double-click a set from the list and the predefined values will be selected. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth.

100 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Define a name for the set in the Enter Frequency Set Name dialog and click OK. .

.g. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups.. script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group. When a script group is selected as <None>. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. but Synchronize script repeats option is selected. By default the script group is selected as <None>. click the Device Settings button Devices window and select Script Properties. but the user can also create new script groups by selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu. in the In the Script File field. and typing the name of the new script group in the field. whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. For example. the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface Properties (see page 52). and their script files are synchronized with one another. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device. e. There are some premade script files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see page 135). browse the script file that you want to use. To be able to use script groups.Script In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement. all script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized. Script groups can be used.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 101 Measurement Properties . With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. The scripts in the same group are synchronized with each other.

the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are given to illustrate their use.102 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual DURING MEASUREMENTS When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement. grids. In the following chapters. you can view the process in a number of graphs. and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. see page 324. . If you have any problems in starting the measurements.

To do frequency scanning. 3. 2.  Note that after you have activated the script. MAKING VOICE CALLS  To make voice calls: 1. . select Measurement control | Stop Scanning. If you are running a script. select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning. To end a scanning measurement. select Stop Voice Call from the Device Commands menu . 73). When you wish to finish the call in manual mode. In the Measurement Properties.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 103 MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner In order to measure with a scanner. Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file. or Measurement control | Start Continuous Scanning. button. insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice Call field. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. With a Mobile To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone. Alternatively. you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Click OK. first make sure that the terminal model supports the scanning feature. wait until the script is finished. Measurement settings page (p.

Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.5. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server. It must be a valid phone number. the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. Measurement Settings dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened. . When Request voice call callback is selected. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application.104 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Voice Call Properties Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements. callback number is recognized automatically.0 or later. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. Number defines the number to be called.

With the Terratec sound card.wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. Service option defines the service option used for the test call.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 105 Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. CDMA specific settings. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1.wav. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds.000 seconds.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix.   Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.000. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. which means that all samples are saved. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. The default threshold value is 5. See page 156 for more information on making scripts. and time in HHMMSS format. 16-bit linear coded . the received audio files are not stored. date in DDMMYYYY format. When a prefix is defined. mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point. Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The threshold values range from 0-5. . 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate. If you leave this field empty. If you want to use your own test samples.

direct. and PSTN. semiduplex. Click the Voice Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened. Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. by means of the PTT button . group. but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button Group: Call from one terminal to a group. both parties can speak at the same time Semiduplex: Call between two terminals. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex. and by pressing the PTT button. Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. It must be a valid phone number. all terminals having that group active can listen.106 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Voice Call Properties – TETRA  Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile.     Duplex: Normal call between two terminals. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. also speak Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. Number defines the number to be called.

The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 107   PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor.000. VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements in GSM. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 386 for complete instructions on setting up and making voice quality measurements. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1. For a list of supported terminals. CDMA2000. 862.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendation P.000 seconds. WCDMA.1 and P. . The Nemo Voice Quality system setup consists of Nemo Outdoor. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. and TD-SCDMA. and the Nemo multi rack. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample in both directions. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. 1-6 mobiles and audio modules (with EVOQ) or 1-4 mobiles and audio modules (with TerraTec). See page 135 for more information on making scripts. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure.862. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice and video calls as perceived by end-users. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. In mobile-to-mobile measurements.

108 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end. the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end. .

When Request voice call callback is selected. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server.5. Number defines the number where the video call will be made. Measurement Settings dialog to access the Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls. . Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. 16-bit linear coded . Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. If you want to use your own test samples. With the Terratec sound card. make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 109 MAKING VIDEO CALLS Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. callback number is recognized automatically. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.0 or later.wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2.

110 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The default threshold value is 5. In the Advanced Properties dialog. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. the received audio files are not stored. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1.wav.  Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be made prior to making the call. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. See page 135 for more information on making scripts.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. The threshold values range from 0-5. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. If you leave this field empty.000. Go to Measurement Properties | General.000 seconds. mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point.   Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. and time in HHMMSS format. and press the Advanced button. you need to select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu. which means that all samples are saved. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. When a prefix is defined. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server. Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. . CDMA specific settings. Service option defines the service option used for the test call. date in DDMMYYYY format.

Samsung Z500.  Note that after you have activated the script.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 111 Select the method based on the list below.  Method 1 .Samsung Z107  Method 3 . LG KF700  Method 8 .Samsung G800  To make video calls and video quality calls: 1. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. . Samsung P920. you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.Samsung Z140. Samsung ZX20  Method 4 . or try each Method separately and select the one that works.LG KU950 . Click OK.Samsung Z105  Method 2 .Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad)  Method 9 .Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile  Method 6 .Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile  Method 7 . Configuration dialog. Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field. In the Measurement Properties. Samsung Z560. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. 2.Samsung ZV10  Method 5 . Alternatively.

and this file needs to accompany the measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. A separate . SMTP.112 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that video quality parameters are supported only with certain Motorola test terminals. However. If you are running a script. Configuring the Data Connection  Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is used for the transfer. If you are making CS data transfers. HTTP. SFTP. 3. WAP. you have several data protocol options for making data transfers: you can use the Iperf for TCP/UDP.  Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call – capable terminal based on Qualcomm chipset. It is possible that if the device is not included in the list of supported terminals. or streaming. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode. Each data transfer needs to be set up and configured individually. FTP. you can make data transfers. The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. wait until the script is finished. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers. select Stop Video Call.  DATA TRANSFERS With mobiles supporting CS and PS data. Terminals verified by Anite Finland support video calls. the user must remember to select the correct method from Measurement Properties | General | Advanced Properties prior to making the call. see chapter Packet Session Settings on page 114. the video call functionality does not work. see chapter Data Call Properties on page 113. POP3.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. .  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. In Nemo Outdoor. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. Advanced button) prior to performing data measurements. If you are making PS data transfers. HTTP Browsing. you need to enable the packet decoding function (Measurement settings button General Properties.

Open the Data Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view. Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link Adaptation (ALA). .120). Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface. UMTS. and password) are operator-specific. Compression defines if no compression or v. Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction. Modem type refers to the modem type that the dial-up server is using. Number defines the number to be called of the dial-up server. Password refers to the dial-up server password. There are separate views for GSM.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 113 Data Call Properties Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. username. The parameters are the same.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call. The UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters.110 and v.42bis compression is used. Username refers to the dial-up server username. and CDMA. The alternatives are Analog (v.34) and ISDN (v. The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best channel coding. Settings related to the dial-up server (number.

Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring. All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. Double-click the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function.114 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Packet Session Settings Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. .

Listen port refers to the port used by the client. each connection must have its own IP address. Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. For TCP and UDP protocols. the default port is 6015. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the TCP (IPerf) and UDP (IPerf) items in the Devices view. the same IP address can be used.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 115 TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)  Note that it is required that Nemo Server be used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service is slightly modified for optimal performance. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. the default port is 5001. . connection attempt will fail. or both. Note that Firewall should be turned off. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. For TCP and UDP protocols. Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server.

. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0 to 60 seconds. if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s.3Mbps UE category 7 & 8 HSDPA 10.8 180 TCP window size (kB) 4.6 76.4 76. the data connection attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. For example.8 9.4Mbps UE category 9 ~RTT (ms) 600 600 600 200 100 TCP window size (kbit) 38. with HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7. TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission.6 19. throughput 64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 384kbps (Rel.8Mbps UE category 3 & 4 HSDPA 3.116 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. Since UDP does not guarantee successful data transmission. If it is too small.2 9.1 s = 730 kbit = 91. the packet error rate (PER) increases.5 100 1440 180 TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver.8 153. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes. To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7. 99) HSDPA 1.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.6 22.25 100 1020 127.3 Mbit/s * 0. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput. Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired. UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver. there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully). For example. Downlink testing (these values are indicative only): Max. If the transfer attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection. the window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission round-trip time (RTT). UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted.5 100 360 45 100 730 91. it can decrease the maximum data throughput. If higher data transmission rate is used.6Mbps UE category 5 & 6 HSDPA 7.2Mbps UE category 9 HSDPA 14.25 kB.

Create a script (optional) (page 151). Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 117 UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. The size of the individual data packages is defined in the Packet Size field. the Transfer duration option will be disabled. 5. Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes. The FTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Click the PDP Context Properties button. 2. Normally when a data transfer is initialized.   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. and password) are operator-specific. that is. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers. the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred. Configuring the FTP Protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. the transfer finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1. and in that case the data transfer would fail. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 118). It should be smaller than the maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers. The server can be any standard FTP server. With passive mode. click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog.460 bytes.  Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog. the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. username.  To set up data measurements using FTP 1. This is because when the Transfer data size option is used. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of smaller data throughput. 6. It is not limited by time. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be avoided. .500 bytes. Next. 3.

See instructions on page 135. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. each connection must have its own IP address. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. you can start the actual data transfer. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode. FTP Transfer Properties Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view. After you have completed the setup. Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server. and in that case the data transfer would fail.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. the same IP address can be used. . Port refers to the port used by the FTP server. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.118 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. With passive mode. If you encounter problems with the data transfer.

all threads will start from the beginning. For example. If you are receiving data. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. Resume is not supported with multi threaded FTP transfers. Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. Nemo Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.  . you must define a different remote file for each connection. this is the destination file.bin. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. etc. this is the source file. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Address refers to the address of the proxy. you must define a different local file for each connection. If you are sending data. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. the size of the downloaded file is 10MB.txt. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Multi-threaded FTP transfer mode is supported in receive direction. The number of threads is set to five. All five FTP transfer sessions are started simultaneously. this is the output file. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Paths tab (see page 55). In case of a data drop.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 119 Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. filename_tester1. and SOCKS5. If you are receiving data..txt. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server. filename_tester2. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. This functionality is available with FTP upload testing.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file. Supported types are Tunneling. transfer will fail.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP session. If you are sending data. SOCKS4.g. connection attempt will fail. this is the source file.

Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 121). and in that case the data transfer would fail. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 6. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices.  To set up data measurements using SFTP 1. you can start the actual data transfer. 2. The server can be any standard SFTP server. See instructions on page 135.120 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Configuring the SFTP Protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client. 7. 3. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. . Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. After you have completed the setup. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Normally when a data transfer is initialized. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. 5. the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. and password) are operator-specific. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. username.   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. With passive mode. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. The SFTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. Create a script (optional) (page 151).

SOCKS4. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server. Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. and SOCKS5. . Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server. each connection must have its own IP address.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. the same IP address can be used. connection attempt will fail. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Address refers to the address of the proxy. Supported types are Tunneling. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 121 SFTP Transfer Properties Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.

you must define a different remote file for each connection. filename_tester2. If you are receiving data. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size.txt. and password) are operator-specific. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. 3. this is the destination file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. In the HTTP testing. username. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. the user selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured.g. If you are sending data. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP session. If you are receiving data. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 123). Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. this is the output file.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing.. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. filename_tester1.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Create a script (optional) (page 151). we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e. you must define a different local file for each connection. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server. . transfer will fail.txt. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. this is the source file.bin. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>.  Configuring the HTTP Protocol The HTTP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP protocol. 5. 2.122 Nemo O ut door User M a nual In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. 6. Paths tab (see page 55). etc. If you are sending data. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. this is the source file.  To set up data measurements using HTTP 1.

Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp. In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog.   Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. http://www. you can define the required data transfer settings.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 123 7. you can use the same URL for all of them. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If you are sending HTTP data. and SOCKS5. . Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. After you have completed the setup. connection attempt will fail. URL defines the destination. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. See instructions on page 135. Supported types are Tunneling.htm. HTTP Transfer Properties Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. Each thread transfers the entire file. SOCKS4. The number of threads can be defined by the user. you can start the actual data transfer. For example. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Address refers to the address of the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements.com/testfile.yourcompany.

3. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. transfer will fail. 7. Create a script (optional) (page 151). Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP Browsing protocol. Configure the data connection for CS data or PS data (page 114). See instructions on page 135. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Define browser transfer -related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog (page 123). Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. create a script with several HTTP transfers.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. 2. 5. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. 6. After you have completed the setup. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Paths tab (see page 55). . you must define a different local file for each connection.  To set up data measurements using HTTP 1. the user selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. In HTTP testing.124 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  If you encounter problems with the data transfer. To make consecutive transfers. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. you can start the actual data transfer.

g. information about the images. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. and password) are operator-specific. e. The cache and cookies information is cleared after every download. For example. URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. username. the transfer will fail. .  Configuring the POP3 Protocol POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. http://www. for benchmarking purposes as EACH CONNECTION MUST HAVE ITS OWN IP ADDRESS. Close window after transfer closes the browser window after the data transfer. The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze  For MULTI browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used for multiple simultaneous data connections. The average PPP and RLC data throughputs are also available.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 125 Browser Transfer Properties Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the Devices view. PPP and RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing.  To set up data measurements using POP3 1. If Decode content information is selected.PAD). POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.htm. texts and links are written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the whole page is written to the measurement file. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active (PAC.

3. 7. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 126).   Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. 6. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). After you have completed the setup. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server. Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server. . Create a script (optional) (page 151). you can start the actual data transfer. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. each connection must have its own IP address. E-Mail Settings – POP3 Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view. POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements. See instructions on page 135. the same IP address can be used. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. 5.126 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2.

Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. This will save disk space. 5. Create a script (optional) (page 151). Supported types are Tunneling. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. and SOCKS5. and password) are operator-specific. See instructions on page 135. Configuring the SMTP Protocol POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. If a connection is not established within the defined time. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. SOCKS4. Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received from the e-mail server. 7. 6. 3. username. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 4. After you have completed the setup. 2. transfer will fail.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.  To set up data measurements using SMTP 1.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 127 Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. you can start the actual data transfer. POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. . Address refers to the address of the proxy. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 128). connection attempt will fail.

each connection must have its own IP address. . connection attempt will fail.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections. it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server. the same IP address can be used. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. Therefore. Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server. SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.128 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual E-Mail Settings – SMTP Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor. Supported types are Tunneling. E-Mail Editor Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. . If the transfer does not continue within the defined time.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 129 Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. See page 129 for more information on the E-Mail Editor. and SOCKS5. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Address refers to the address of the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use. SOCKS4. transfer will fail. Click the Edit button to open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow.

in web browsing. 4. Configuring the WAP Protocol The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP protocol. username. The WAP protocol is used. 3. 6. 5. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. In the WAP testing. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. for example. the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog (page 131). Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). . and password) are operator-specific. 2. After you have completed the setup. Create a script (optional) (page 151).130 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114).  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.  To set up data measurements using WAP 1. you can start the actual data transfer. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use. See instructions on page 135.

. WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. To make consecutive downloads. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. transfer will fail. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway.com/testfile. For example. connection attempt will fail. If you encounter problems with the data transfer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 131 WAP Transfer Properties Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view. WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. the same URL can be used. http://www. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections.htm.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals.yourcompany. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. each connection must have its own IP address. Paths tab (see page 55). The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. create a script with several WAP transfers. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

5. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices.132 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. You can download a free player from the www. username. 2.real. for example.    A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). and password) are operator-specific. IP packet capturing must be enabled. Create a script (optional) (page 151). In the streaming testing. you must define a different local file for each connection. See instructions on page 135. Note that in order to make streaming measurements. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.  To set up data measurements using streaming: 1. 3. 7. The streaming protocol is used. the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol and this data transfer is measured. Define Streaming properties (page 133). 6. 4.com website. Configuring the Streaming Protocol The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the streaming protocol. Refer to page 151 for more information. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. in video streaming. you need to have RealPlayer installed on the computer. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). Note that to make video streaming quality measurements. After you have completed the setup. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. . you can start the actual data transfer.

With ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. If a connection is not established within the defined time. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. username. etc. To make consecutive downloads. Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts. connection attempt will fail. URL defines the IP address of the video file that will be streamed. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections.real. For example. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. rtsp://yourcompany. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. RealPlayer version 10.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 133 Streaming Properties Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices view. Configuring the Trace Route Protocol By conducting Trace Route testing functionality. and password) are operator-specific.com/testfile.5 is supported.com website. RealPlayer is not installed on the computer. create a script with several streaming sessions. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing. you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the target server. You can download a free player from the www. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow.rm. it is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding. transfer will fail.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. .  Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.

2. Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.com. www. 6. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). See instructions on page 135. HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals. each connection must be given its own. 5. HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete. separate IP address! Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal.anite.134 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  To set up data measurements using the Trace Route Protocol 1. See below how to define Trace Route properties. The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement. Create a script (optional) (page 151). deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. for example. . Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). the same IP address can be used! If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. you can start the actual data transfer. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. 4. After you have completed the setup. 3. Trace Route Properties Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices view. 7.

Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP context and make the GPRS attach. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 133). Browsing. you will need to install RealPlayer 10 or 11 and Apple QuickTime 7. To end the data transfer/data call. or streaming). Then select 3. the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo Outdoor. Check that RealPlayer and Apple QuickTime 7. 3. POP3.  To make data transfers: 1. Nemo Outdoor supports Psytechnics PVI streaming video quality testing. click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Packet Session. Making Data Transfers After you have configured the data connection (CS or PS data) and selected and configured the data protocol (Iperf (TCP/UDP). The graph will now display the selected parameter. select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed. WAP. STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the network. . HTTP.  Note that after you have activated the script. and measures video quality type. 5. FTP. select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button .  Making streaming video quality measurements: 1. Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements. for example. so multi measurements are not possible. Wait until the call is connected and dial-up connection established. jitter. Open a line graph (Data | Line Graph | New). and MOS. To make manual PS data calls.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 135 By selecting the Resolve host names item. Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. From the Measurement menu. click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Data Call.2 player are installed on the computer. SMTP. you can start making the data transfers. In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements. packet error rate. 4. To make manual CS data calls. SFTP. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button. 2.  Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers. From the Measurement menu. and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 133). You can view. 2. 4. select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call. from a line graph some streaming parameters. A video preview can also be seen during the measurement in Nemo Outdoor.2 player on the computer. Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK.

Domain defines the address of the SIP server. When selected. Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy. Nemo Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server.136 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VOIP CALLS With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor. Proxy address/port defines the proxy. Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid.g. automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as soon as Packet Session has been created).fi. through which SIP messages are sent.org/applications/pbx To start making VoIP call measurements. pbx. The default SIP port is 5060. Automatic registration.asterisk. Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the corresponding password. To find more information on installing the Asterisk SIP server. login to http://www. Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server. . when selected. a user is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions. Port defines the SIP port. In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements. you will need to install a SIP server. e. you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the SIP Server Settings and VoIP call configurations dialogs. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option and double-clicking the SIP Server item in the Devices view.nemo.

5. in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is G729/8000. To register SIP server. To start VoIP measurement. a new call can be made without unregistering) . To end VoIP measurement. Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds. 6. In addition. to unregister SIP server. 2. click on the Measurement control button | Register SIP Server. SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver. For example. 4. click on the Measurement control button | Unregister SIP Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step. click on the Measurement control button | Start Packet Session.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 137 Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option and double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices view. 3. Select the Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Devices view and define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations. click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call. click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call. Finally.  Making VoIP measurements: 1. only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an incoming call. Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. To start packet session. The order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a counterparty.

Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. When the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database. Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing. +3581234567.138 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SMS TESTING SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. . Open the SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view. All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages. When the End-to-end message option is selected. Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages are sent. The limit is set to 15000 characters. a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings. Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code. for example.

Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS. send an SMS to the target phone number from the phone’s keypad. 6. i. Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor. Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu).. logging to MMSC. you will need to define some MMS-related settings in the Packet Session Settings dialog. 3. In order to be able to make MMS measurements. SMS Testing with CDMA terminals  Note that the SMS testing functionality may depend on your terminal's software version. 1. Also separate delays from Attach. LG KX206. MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts. SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the terminal.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 139   Making SMS testing measurements: Note that with CDMA terminals. select All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . MMS TESTING MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. In the Devices view. for example. 5. click on the Measurement control button and select Send SMS Message. 2. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are sending the test SMS message. See the applicable datasheet for further information. you must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. 4. LG VX8350. before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testingrelated events. After that Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again. Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor. 3. 2. The testing goes as follows. Type in the test message and click OK. 1. LG KX256. . and LG LHD-200E. From the Measurement menu. LG VX8100. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing include LG C680. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.e. You can view. and message sending/receiving are recorded. LG C676. the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling statistical success rate calculations. PDP context activation. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Define the Timeout. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS messages. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phone’s Saved messages folder.

This setting is operator-specific. Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements. MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. All the parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific. Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway.140 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   If you are using the Nokia 6630. MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements. This setting is operator-specific. the script must not contain a PDP activation command. Packet Session Settings for MMS Open the Packet Session Settings . MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. . This setting is operator-specific. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated. This setting is operator-specific. This setting is operator-specific. 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing. Some special MMS settings are required. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring. The MMS tab is opened by default. MMS In the MMS tab.MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging Service item in the Devices view. please see page 142.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor. MMS Editor Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages. Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message. Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message. . Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use. Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use. Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 141 Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated. Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use. Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.

press Messag. for example. and N80 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor. and N80: 1. 6680. . and N80 You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia 6630. 4. 2. 5. MMS Settings for Nokia 6630. On the phone main window. 3.  Changing MMS settings for Nokia 6630. If you are making manual measurements.135). Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS.141). 6680. Some special MMS settings are required. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor (p. create a script for MMS measurements (p.  Making MMS measurements: 1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (p.140). The grid will now display only the selected MMS testingrelated events. 6.142 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Making MMS Measurements Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements. Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. 6680. select Send MMS Message from the Measurement control menu or from the Measurement menu. You can view. Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). If you are using a script. 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing. that is. This will start the measurement. not using a script. If you want to make automated measurements. activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. please see page 142. If you are using the Nokia 6630.   You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.

From the menu. From the Settings view. . press Options. 3. 4.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 143 2. select Multimedia message. select Settings. In the Messaging view.

Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile on and off. 8. Select the Reception if roaming option and change it to Off. 6. .144 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5. in home net. 7. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None. Select the Recept. and change it to Off.

6120. press Options. and 6121 You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95. 6120. and 6121: 1. . and 6121 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor. press Messaging.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 145 MMS Settings for Nokia N95.  Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95. 2. In the Messaging view. 6120. On the phone main window.

select Settings. From the Settings view. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.146 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. select Multimedia message. From the menu. 4. 5. .

msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone. Select Allow anon. . or by selecting Options| Change| No. Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 147 6. 8. 7. Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.

the testing of data protocols that are not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. for example. The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are not built into Nemo Outdoor.148 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 9. An APP event is written to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. . Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. The user must set the cache size to minimum from the browser settings. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP data throughput parameter. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No. Add menu. You can define the executable as well as the command-line parameters. This enables. START EXTERNAL APPLICATION This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the automatic measurement sequence. 10. The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor. Select Start External Application from the menu. The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. Finally switch the mobile off and on.

For example. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. Define the path where the application . If this time is exceeded. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field. You can also leave the field empty. www.com. Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. For example. for example. the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter (=-1). You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server.exe file is located on your computer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 149 Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making measurements. Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged. In addition to the duration. Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started. The options are: . If you select the Wait until completed option. In addition. C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox. The value determines the size of the packet sent to the server. C:\Temp. define here a URL (http://www.anite.com/nemo).exe. if you start Internet Explorer. it determines the size of the reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor. ICMP PING The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping measurements simultaneously with data transfers. Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server.anite. Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example. the test script will be on hold until the external application is closed. Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. also define where the delay will occur.

RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times. From the Measurement control menu. Otherwise. If you selected the Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog. a new request is sent immediately after the reply. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says ‘PDP Context Activated’. 2. 3. Click the Start Recording button . 5. If “delay between request” is selected. Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.  To make ping measurements: 1. New request is sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms).  Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping measurement is repeated. If the delay is less than the ping delay. Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you stop it manually. Define the required ping parameters and click OK. a new request is sent every 1000ms. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. select Start ICMP Ping.150 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending new request. select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement. . If “delay between request” is selected. a new request is sent every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request. Example 2. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view.1s (100ms + 1000ms). click on the Measurement control button and select Start Packet Session. 4. Example 1. New request is sent every 1. In the Devices view.

1. network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. go to Microsoft website at <http://www. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3. Once the installation file is downloaded.2 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation. double-click on it.aspx?familyid=f4db40af-1e08-4a21-a26bec2f4dc4190d&displaylang=en> to download the free Network Monitor installation package.com/downloads/details. it will NOT be possible to install Network Manager after Nemo Outdoor installation.microsoft. A separate log file is generated for each test terminal making data transfers. In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor. Select the NM32_x86_setup.exe installation file and click on Download.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 151 IP PACKET CAPTURING  Note that the Microsoft Network Manager needs to be installed on your computer BEFORE installing Nemo Outdoor! If you do not select this option. you must configure a dial-up connection (see the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for more information) and install the Network Monitor driver for the dial-up connection. After setting up the dial-up connection. . With IP packet capturing.

and click Next. 3. Click Next in the Welcome dialog.152 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2. In the End-User License Agreement dialog select I accept the terms in the License Agreement option. .

It is recommended to select the Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended) option. Select Typical in the Choose Setup Type dialog that appears. . Click Next to continue with installation. 5.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 153 4.

General page. In the Advanced Properties dialog. 7. Click the Advanced button. Next. select the Enable IP Capture option. 9. Start Nemo Outdoor. install Nemo Outdoor. and go to the Measurement Properties. Click Install in the Ready to install dialog.154 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. Click Finish in the Completing the Setup Wizard dialog. 8. . add a device.

the Network Monitor driver is not installed. Set up a dial-up connection (see Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions). In Nemo Outdoor.pcap) for each measurement terminal and the data can be analyzed with Ethereal. 1. IP packet capturing data is stored in a separate file (.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. enable IP capturing in the Advanced Properties dialog.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 155  Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list. A separate .pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is enabled. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. 3. you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. .   Performing IP Packet Capturing: Network Monitor needs to be installed prior to installing Nemo Outdoor for IP packet capturing to show in Nemo Outdoor. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (. 2.

000. The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script. Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements. Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script. Select a row from the table and click the button to change the settings for that function. . The selected item is added to the script. You can choose any of the items in the list that opens when you click the Add button. the settings that have been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear. See the following chapter for an explanation of the different items under the Add button. if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties – Configuration dialog. Delete deletes the selected entry row. You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script Editor dialog. Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. The extension for all Script files is . For example.nsf. When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected.156 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MAKING SCRIPT FILES  Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners. You can access this dialog by clicking the Device script settings button clicking the Script Editor button. in the Devices view and The table in the middle shows a list of all the functions and parameters that will be executed during a measurement. The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10. Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script.

For example. Carrier RSSI value -68dBm  Triggers the IF string . Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed. which means that when starting the measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received. Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one. Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm  triggers the IF string 2.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 157 New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value. The reference value is unknown. IF condition is triggered o “Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed  Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes.  Notes about script functions:   Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF loop Examples of conditions: o “Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm  Whenever the value is other than -70dBm. Close exits the dialog. Carrier RSSI value -70dBm  nothing happens 3. the IF condition is triggered. the IF condition is triggered. 1. opens a dialog for inserting the file name.

the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically.158 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Script Transfer Stop Commands With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command.. if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to UMTS. The forced stop command. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds. Call duration is set to 120 seconds. or when system changes to UMTS. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three. After the call is connected. . the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes. Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. GSM voice call example. For example. For example. or at most 120 seconds.g. with voice calls. whichever comes first. the script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS. In the example below. If a data transfer is not completed during a userdefined time. e. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait commands as well. instead of waiting for its completion. a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect.

the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call duration is reached. In the example below the script waits until the system changes to UMTS. If line eight were End a voice call (forced). or after 60 seconds. Once the system is in UMTS. The data transfer is aborted when the system changes to GSM. whichever comes first.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 159 The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. the voice call would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred. The call duration is 60 seconds. voice call is continued. or after 60 seconds. In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. The script stops. If the system changes to GSM before 60 seconds. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM. . the script waits 5 seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. but at most for 60 seconds. waiting until the system changes to GSM.

or after 60 seconds. . but data transfer is continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command. whichever comes first. or after 60 seconds. The data transfer and voice call are aborted when the system changes to GSM. The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM.160 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example.

See earlier chapters for more detailed information on the dialogs. by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send DTMF sequences. You can e.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 161 Add Menu The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. This command can only be used during voice calls. . Selecting an item may open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. The Start External Application item is described in more detail on page 142. make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones.g. In the Script Editor.

The idea is to start FTP download simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. .162 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Wait Settings To add pauses in the script. Both synchronization methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different conditions for the wait. With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points inside the script file. In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. select Wait. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings dialog. With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues. Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

3. As many synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. you can set a 10 second pause after a voice call is finished and before the next call starts. The until: Current system option enables you to define that the script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down menu is in use. define also the maximum wait time in seconds after which the script will continue. you can make the script pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. With the Last notification option you can define a wait period after certain event notifications. call attempt. It should be noted that the number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal. .  Adding a pause in the script file: 1. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a certain event notification. With the Current time option you can define a pause between items in the script. such as. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option. it is not necessary to use the script group. With the Next notification option you can make the script wait for a certain event notification to appear. For example.  Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here. For example.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 163 Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be synchronized. 2. But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not appear. This will prevent the script from continuing before the call attempt has completed. you can make the script wait until the system changes from GSM to UMTS. In this example. For example. First define the wait time in seconds.

Here you can define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If . . you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Outdoor will perform the set of commands within the If . If the criteria set in this dialog are met. If you want to remove the condition from the list.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. Click OK. the commands between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed. Next.End If block in the script takes place. If the criteria are met. In this example the serving system must be UMTS FDD. Click Add to list to add the condition to the list. select it and click Remove. and if the criteria are not met.164 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Advanced Conditional Blocks By selecting Advanced | If/End If. this set of commands will be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command. In the following example script.End If block. Serving sys. Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. and move them to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. add commands to the script from the Add menu. In the Condition and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the commands inside the If-End If block to take place. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu.

By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop. You can select from the following loop options:  Repeat the loop x times .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 165 Loops You can add loops in the script files. you will enter the Loop Settings dialog.

Then define the condition and value for the selected parameter. Click OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script. . In the first example.166 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual    Repeat the loop for x minutes Repeat the loop until the time is x Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for the loop to take place. Click the Field button to select a parameter. the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script. You can move the commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs.

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs to be greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 167 The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be repeated. the call stops. . In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been selected from the Field drop-down menu. The commands inside the loop block will be performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.

The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file. 2. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement according to the script file. Note that you need to define the script for each device individually.  To run the script file: 1. General dialog (see p. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in the User Interface Properties.168 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Running Scripts After you have created a script. . you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button ). In the Measurement Properties. Scripts dialog. Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button . After the script is finished. The script can be different for each device. select the script in the Script File field. it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.51). 3. Nemo Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button.

The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 169 MEASUREMENT LISTS Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining multiple scripts.g. e. For example. measurement list files (*.nmix) are saved to Configuration files folder. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file.. By default. Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement list is started. Click Add New to add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list. %a %A %b Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name . 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. In Online mode. select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List dialog. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after another. Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. Filename defines the filename format. You can also use measurement lists in idle mode. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds.

no characters if time zone is unknown %Z Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished. Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files reaches a certain limit. with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6.M. as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. Properties opens the Measurement Properties . as decimal number (00 – 99) Year with century. Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number.170 Nemo O ut door User M a nual %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366) Month as decimal number (01 – 12) Minute as decimal number (00 – 59) Sequence number (1 – ) Sequence number (1 – ) Current locale's A. Define the size in kilobits (KB). Click the Script Editor button to edit the selected script. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).Script dialog. depending on registry settings. Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. Start runs the measurement list. . Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a certain period of time./P. with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53) Year without century.M. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 – 59) Week of year as decimal number.    Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running. depending on registry settings.

Finally. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed. 3. 2. Select a device from the Devices list. you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a call.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 171  Creating a measurement list: 1. some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via the mobile keypad. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list. In other words. the Neighbor Stations window displays only Serving Cell values. Channel Locking  This functionality is available for GSM and UMTS mobiles only. You can lock GSM and UMTS test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process. the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel. Note that if you are using the single mode. To save the measurement list. In addition to these. 7. FORCING FUNCTIONS Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user interface. 4. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features available for each terminal. Select a script from the Script File field. click Start. you must switch the mobile on manually. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode. you must keep the test mobile connected to the power cord. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously. Select the When all scripts are completed option. 5. click Save. . 6. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script Editor button. If the mobile is not connected to the power cord and the program switches it off.    To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel: Note that when the channel lock is activated. the connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station.

A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. 3. 2. select the device and click the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Channel Locking. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing functions | Channel locking dialog to release the channel lock. Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button.172 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 1. When you have connected the measurement device. The Channel Locking dialog will appear on your screen. . The button will remain pushed down indicating that channel lock is activated.

Using the Band Locking dialog. you can force the mobile to use only one band or system at a time. Click Close to exit the dialog. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the band lock. Choose a band or system from the list and click the Lock button. You can open the Band Locking dialog by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Band Locking. . You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and systems. This will lock the mobile to the band/system you have chosen.  Always remember to switch the mobile power off and on again to activate/deactivate the band lock.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 173 Band Locking  This functionality is available only with GSM mobiles. open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button. You will need to switch the mobile off and on to activate the band lock. The band lock will be released after you switch the mobile power off and on.

force a handover to every neighbor cell. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP. For example. the user is notified. If the command fails. Define the channel and handover type and click OK. The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.e. as you can. and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP) . Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6. or in GSM to a different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). the corresponding button will indicate this. The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the handover to. You do not have to wait for the mobile to make handovers. It is also possible to send the same command several times without clicking other commands (i. send a new Handover Forcing command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. i. the device can be forced to scrambling code 6. Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings button | Handover Control). Start a measurement and initiate a call (Measurement control button | Start Voice Call). code. Normal mode. The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets.e. Handover forcing and Handover suppression.174 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Handover Control  This functionality is available only with certain Nokia terminals. The user has three mode request commands. for example. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user. the user can set a new target cell and press the Handover forcing button again. Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM or WCDMA. the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 175 During Normal mode. but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM. band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA. In case the current serving system is GSM. forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally.

Scrambling code 6 is selected to be a target cell.176 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values. the terminal active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active cell. Handover forcing is done by biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. handover mode can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification. For example. the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user. By pressing the Handover forcing button.6dB shown as a brown curve. . in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. Scrambling code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green.

. Once the mode is changed back to normal.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set. scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value -4.7dB. Scrambling code 6 is seen with Ec/N0 value -18. Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. the terminal starts reporting unbiased values. This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 177 Once the button is pressed. The device sends measurement reports to the network with biased values.

the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to other cells. You can use this feature. See Making Scripts on page 156. .178 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual When the Handover suppression button is pressed. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/ measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when driving away from a base station.  Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. for example.

that is. With the Nemo Outdoor GSM measurement mobiles you can also access barred cells. and only barred cells (Reverse). . You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Barring. During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end users (Accept). The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Barring.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 179 Cell Barring  This functionality is available for GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only. all cells. also cells that are barred (Ignore).

no Packet call settings are displayed RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing. For example. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell or to packet call testing . If the user selects both. Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. without this call the neighbour list may remain empty. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing.180 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CELL TESTING The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked to a cell at a time. only cells stronger than the value defined here will be included in the test Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell. and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the cell. Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. This is necessary since if the cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one. if Voice call is selected. During the call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. only cells that are stronger than this value will be included in the test Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if no voice connection is formed. the test starts with a voice connection attempt.

A terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list. The green color indicates successful attempts. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. The Test results page shows the progress of the test. You have three options in which to perform missing neighbor detection: 1. a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a given time. with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection. and the number the number of attempts. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements. and inter-system cells. whereas a scanner measures all available cells. inter-frequency. a scanner and a mobile. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile. . but is detected/measured by the scanner.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 181 Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. 2. a scanner. Hence. Missing neighbor measurements are also supported on some Nokia terminals. the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection functionality. Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency. or 3. MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION Real‐time missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time.

182 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile 1.  Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and Top-N option deselected. . Next. In the Devices view. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the Frequency scanning view. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor. select the device and click the Measurement control button . Select Frequency Scanning Properties. 2. click on Select Channels.

click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected missing neighbors. click the Add All button. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. 7. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already. 6. Click OK and OK. To select all available channels for scanning.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 183 4. Once the selected scans have been performed. . and select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning. 5. To add channels to the Selected list.

default 3. If you are performing missing neighbor detection with a scanner only. Configure the devices so that they are measuring the same frequency and channels. You can observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters. select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. Ec/N0. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is not available for CDMA/EVDO. If the measured RX level is below the threshold. The field displays the scanner(s) used. the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding.-110dBm. In GSM Missing Neighbor detection. difference to strongest. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection. such as. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing neighbor. Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. However. From Measurement | <device name>. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and.   Number of missing neighbors: Max. A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list. default -95dBm . based on the data. the channel is not detected as a missing neighbor. reports the neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list.184 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. RX level: -50. note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results. and RSCP related to the missing neighbors. 32.

for example. click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match. In a pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure. or there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The bar graph with the selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s). PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS Available for UMTS.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 185 Open a bar graph. and analysis is always active. Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. . Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events. CDMA and EV-DO networks. with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New. Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network from one another. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.

Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/N0 value. Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 12dB. UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own. The pilot count includes active and monitored sets. For example.186 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot count includes active and neighbor sets. Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 3. For example. Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/I0 value. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button . pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. The event includes the following information:         Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/N0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) . Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB. RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. called ”CELLPOLLUTION”. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm.

 Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen. . and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 187  NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the moment.

The event includes the following information:         Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/I0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) . called ”CELLPOLLUTION”.188 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements   Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis .Mobile Phones Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own.

With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:     Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB 200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB 400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB 600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 189  Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen. CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis . Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference. or adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal. or it can be also from out of band in some circumstances. system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference. and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel interference with voice. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency. ETSI 05.Scanners   Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS In GSM mobile communication networks. and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.

RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. RX level sub. Please note that all test terminals do not report C/I value. missing neighbor detection. RX quality and C/I values. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available.190 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and playback with Nemo Outdoor. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. the sub values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used. If frequency hopping is used. as with. With RX level and RX quality. e. the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning receiver. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode.g. C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. Default values are:    RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm) RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4) Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB) The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:     Terminal serving channel number or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping Cell ID RX level sub . C/I average value is used. OR RX level sub and C/I These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference analysis. The user must enable interference analysis similarly. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. During dedicated mode. Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information. when AMR speech codec is used. the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network. or BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. For example. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ . Once triggering is done. GSM terminal continuously reports RX level.1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:  RX level sub and RX quality sub. The user can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface.

the following data is extracted from scanner measurements and written to terminal measurement file:    Channel number. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows for GSM interference analysis. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be seen during the measurement and playback. RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1) Channel number. for example. RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1) Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views. Table grid and bar graph.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 191   RX quality sub C/I if available For each terminal serving channel number X. RX level and BSIC for channel X Channel number. in a table grid and bar graph. .

To start a band scan. Finally press the Start Scan button. EV-DO PN. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted technologies and bands are unknown. With the default threshold values it takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900. Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for the parameters available. Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings.192 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual BAND SCAN With the Nemo FSR1 scanner you can perform band scanning. right click the Nemo FSR1 item in the Devices view and select Band Scan. Please note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown. The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values. WCDMA SC. 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands. All specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN. Signal strength and signal quality are reported for each identified channel. LTE Cell ID) for every valid channel of that technology type are reported. .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 193 Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page.csv). . It is possible to save the results to a text file (.

Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog will be opened. Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last. This must be a valid number. . Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested. it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel. the test may continue indefinitely.  Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option. With Nemo Outdoor.194 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual TIMESLOT TESTING  This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.

for example. Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. in the case they are already reserved for data testing. i. if the user stops the testing. The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far. and the number in the slot the number of calls made in the timeslot. Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the … button to enter the Select Channel dialog. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call. Selecting timeslots will exclude them from the test. Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. for example. . Green color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from the test by selecting them (grey). This happens.e. the measurement will stop on its own. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their timeslots. When there are no more white slots left.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 195 In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.

To open an empty graph. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. There are some pre-made custom windows of each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. and vertical and horizontal bar graphs. . It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it.196 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING GRAPHS There are four types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor: line and scatter graphs. See page 315 for opening custom windows. select Data | [graph type] | New.

press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. Clear the Windows button. The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next. Graph Popup Menu Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the graph. and all the custom windows will be hidden. The Parameters view contents can be filtered using the Parameters and Windows buttons. . Clear the Parameters button. and all parameters will be hidden. right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the parameter to be opened. After this.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 197 Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First.

Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). if you select LTE FDD. For example. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.jpg image. Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a . The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. See page 302 for more information on view groups. Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. . the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.198 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows.

Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. Select parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button . This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales. the axis changes depending on the active layer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 199 Graph Properties Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button . If you select Default. Autoscroll Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the graph view scroll as the measurement progresses. Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button . You can also define different parameters for the axes. Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter full screen mode. Edit Parameters By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog. Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the bar in the graph.

. drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot towards the corners with the red dots. This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters. Values Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel. do the same in reverse. Side Panel Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. Use the up to move the parameters in the editing field.Scatter Graph To zoom in on a scatter graph. To zoom out. You can also open it by clicking the Side Panel dialog button . Layers Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel. dragging the mouse from a red dot to a green dot. Full Screen Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. and down arrow buttons The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. Zoom .200 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 201 .

a layer can be dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button to remove the layer.Layers The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons.202 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Graph Side Panel . The order of the layers can also be changed by dragging them with the mouse. For example. . The layer is now removed.

you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of the Layers view. right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu. . To reopen the view. Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 203 To create space in the graph side panel. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view.

Move Group Up. Remove Group. Layer groups can be used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. . Rename Group. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.204 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grouping Layers The New Group. Move Group Down and Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.

. The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 205 Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

.206 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Groups can be removed. Select a parameter in the Y or X field. renamed and moved up and down. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group. Define the layer properties. See Layer Properties on page 207 for more detailed information. line style and color. New Layer The New Layer command creates a new layer. such as. You can also create a new group and drag and drop parameters into the group.

. 100 = totally transparent) Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. Line width defines the line thickness in pixels Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs" appearance) or one straight line Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. 212 for more information on graph layer color configuration. or whether a color set based on parameter values is used. The dialog can also be accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 207 Hide Layer The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer. Data can be sorted based on descending or ascending order Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque. Remove Layer The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or fixed color set. Layer Properties Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. See p. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the selected layer.

g. If the list is empty. this is not used Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. RACH TX Power. it is possible to define various filters: Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below or above the minimum and maximum values.208 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Window size defines the number of values to be averaged Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the user. Such parameters are. If Automatic scale is set to Yes. Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu. If 0. If the list is empty. no filtering is used TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter.. Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the instantaneous values in the graph Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.g. E. only pilots or both Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or…). so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar.). Automatic scale also needs to be set to No. The data tip will display information from that point of time. appropriate filtering is not used so that it is possible to filter only channels. RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count.. Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale..). . Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. for example.. no filtering is used TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. below bottom three RX levels are shown. this is not used Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the userdefined limits for a measurement result is set. Depending on the parameter.. no filtering is used Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or. Such graphs include also the following layer properties. If Automatic scale is set to Yes. E.. Some of the graph types support data tips. if Automatic scale is set to No. if the list is empty.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 209 In the following example three RACH parameters are shown in the graph. and each of them has a different point style. Arrow Down/Up The Arrow Down and Arrow Up icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph panel. . You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view with the mouse.

If a given parameter value consists of more than one value. a separate parameter window appears. Layers can be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. Select a layer in the Layers view. and double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.210 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Layer Device Selection The Layer Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. The Layer Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately. . Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window.

By clicking the maximize icon at the upper right-hand corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. in the example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. Click the exit icon at the top to close the view. For example. You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values. the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter and its values. above or below each other. . In the example below all views are separate. beside. You can also drag and drop the Values and Parameter views inside.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 211 In the example above.

. add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree.212 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By right-clicking on the Values view.g. double-click on a layer in the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog. etc. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. as different colors can be assigned e. First. cell ID. scrambling codes. and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters. Graph Layer Color Configuration Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. you can access the Edit Parameters dialog (see page 199). Next. to different channels..

The graph will be colored based on the fixed color you selected. If you choose Fixed color. Define the fixed color by selecting it in the Standard or Custom page. . or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color automatically.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 213 If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph. click … to enter the Colors dialog.

214 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and Color set fields. and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set parameter menu. Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu. .

Here you can edit the color set selected. button. In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. See Color Set Editor on page 273 for more information. The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 215 To edit the color set in question. It will lead you to the Color Set Properties dialog.. click on Edit Color Set. Each BSIC is presented with its own color. . the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

and channels without BSIC information are shown with black color.216 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Similarly. All channels with BSIC information appear in green color. the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers. .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 217 The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers. .

Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. To open several decoded message windows. All events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. If you select one of the readymade custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. QoS parameters. Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the selection depends on the technology measured).218 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING GRIDS Along with the graph windows. and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. It will be added there. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices at the same time. You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events. in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as separate columns. However. A separate . In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window.3 to be installed. Click on the parameter and drag it in the grid. you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog. and packet capture data. Alternatively. select Decode Message in New Window option. An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor 3. The options listed in the grid popup menu will be introduced next. . such as statistics from the current measurement. you need to enable the packet decoding function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to performing data measurements.

Grid Popup Menu Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the Direction field. press Ctrl + F. . and type the search string in the Search string field in the Find dialog. the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 219 Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its decoded message. Select the grid view.

. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. Automatic Scrolling Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement progresses. Alternatively. select Call Events (Event name) in the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. or click on the Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog.220 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Save As Custom Window Right-click on a grid table and choose Save As Custom Window from the popup menu. you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event ID. If you want to colorize the background.. In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. See page 302 for more information on view groups. as in the example below. The new custom window is added under the User Interface. size. parameters displayed. You can also access this dialog from the Data menu. You can set a text color and/or a background color for the selected events. and colors.g. Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids To make grids more clear. Save Changes Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. Right-click on the item to rename the custom window. e. and select Configure Colors from the popup menu. select Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set field.  Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices. Custom Windows item in the Configuration Manager dialog. Right-click on a grid. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is opened. if you want to colorize only the text in the grid. You can use this dialog to save a custom window with a name. The dialog below is opened.

Make sure that the color set type is string.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 221 Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Here you can also add more strings to the color set through Add… .

in that case remember to create two new color sets for the same string. Grid Color Configuration Based on Decoded Message in Grids Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a message’s decoded message. defined in the Color Set Properties dialog. it is also possible to color-code both text and background. For example. However. Each color corresponds to a certain type of event. click OK in the Grid Color Configuration dialog. Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs.222 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color code for it. you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field. you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p. It is possible to color-code both the text in the grid and the background color. Finally. In this case. While you can choose to colorize only one of them. you can have a message appear in white text and blue background color.273). If you want. Below you will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. for example. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Click Add… .

You can also create a short name for the new color set. for example. . Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages to be colored with the new color set. Decoded Text in the Name field. or write a description for it. Select string as the color set type.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 223 In the Color Set Properties dialog type.

and Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. In this example the background will be color-coded.224 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click OK. Decoded Text. and Close in the Color Set Editor. select the new color set created above. If you want to colorize only the text. Click OK. Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or the background color. in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field. .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 225 All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text color set. .

you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string in the decoded message. Further. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same message name. 273) | Color Set Properties | String Properties. Color-coding a message based on its name is done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message. . both the message text and background will be colorized. Click OK. or both. You can color-code the message text or the background color. when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p.226 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids Based on Message Name Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs. However.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 227 Next. All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets. . right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors. or select Configure Colors in the Grid Properties dialog. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.

Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field.228 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grid Color Configuration for Parameter Grids Grids can be made clearer through colors. Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. . Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. The Clear All button inactivates the default color sets. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter. You can choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set dropdown menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the text/values in the grid. note that you need to use two different color sets for it.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 229 You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit… In the Color Set Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set. .

Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color Configuration dialog. In the example below a background of the parameter values has been color-coded.230 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. .

. select Configure Colors… the parameter you wish to edit. The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. Click OK to exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 231 Grid Color Configuration for Table Grids Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. In the Grid Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. Right-click on the grid. Click OK. You can also edit the default color sets. and Edit… The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings.

only the selected messages will be displayed. Configure Filters/Quick Filter Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters.232 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used simultaneously. By using filters. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu .

you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu. select hiding all lines. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others. Select the Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. If you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others. select showing all lines. . In addition.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 233 . You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus you options based on which the grid filtering takes place. A conditional row appears giving It is possible to set filtering rules for message name. The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened. button. subchannel and decoded text.

The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18. the plus icon next to the first constituent needs to be clicked. independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon at the top left-hand corner of the dialog. If a condition has two or more constituents. .234 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected. and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place. a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that is less than -5. In the example above. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one another with the text and if. the message is filtered out from the grid. Note also that a separate.

Decode Message This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event). You can also decode messages by double-clicking on the message row. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the message decoding grid as text to clipboard. Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 235 The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. . Alternatively. subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). you can delete all filters by rightclicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu. All messages with the selected event. If you move forward or back in the message decoding grid. subchannel name or message text will be hidden. You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. use the Go to Message button to move to the same message in the messages grid. you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS). The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. In the same way. it is also possible to arrange the contents of the decoded message in three different ways. the text Filtering will appear in the title bar. In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. Right-click on a row in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu. When filtering is enabled.

and the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as text to the clipboard.236 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Format as list arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. The Format as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns. If no text is selected in the decoded text window. The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window. Select a string of text in the decoded text. This is the same as the Copy to Clipboard functionality. . all text in it will be copied.

The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters that can be exported. MapInfo Tab-File Export You can export measurement data into a MapInfo . From Events grids. . In an Events grid.Grid The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.tab file. You can also save the entire grid window as an image file (.tab file.jpg). select Save | MapInfo Tab-File. If you select the Decoded Text option. Also define a File name and Layer title for the exported . Select the parameters that you would like to include in the .txt).D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 237 Decode Message in New Window This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time. Automatic Decode The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest message in decoded form.tab file. Save . the decoded event text is saved in a text file. you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into a CSV file.

you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. select Save | CSV File. Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the . .. In the Symbol Style dialog.tab file. In an Events grid. Finally click OK. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click the Change Symbol button. CSV File Export You can export measurement data into a CSV file.238 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual To change the symbol for each parameter.

Define if the search results should match case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export. To move down to the next match. to be exported. You can also limit the search to decoded messages only. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. Indoor files are not supported at the moment.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 239 The exporting is supported for a single file. press F3. . tab or space. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application. Select All Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. This presents an easy and quick way to select all lines. and the column separator can be a comma. for example. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. Copy The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text or as decoded text. the decoded event text is copied on the clipboard. Find The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid. If you select the Decoded Text option. Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. semicolon. press Shift+F3. To move up to the next match.

You can remove the separator by clicking the open space and choosing Remove Separator from the popup menu. Full Screen The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.  Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view  Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)  Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)  Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Add/Remove Separator The Add/Remove Separator option is relevant only with parameters and Statistics grids. .240 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window. You can choose a statistic or a parameter and add an open space (a separator) above it by first clicking it and then choosing the Add Separator option from the popup menu. Right-click on a grid table and choose Add/Remove Separator from the popup menu. Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view.

for example. You can select the events. If you select. UMTS. etc. parameters. and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. Voice.).D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 241 Grid Properties Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog is opened. The available parameters are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. all the parameters under UMTS are selected. Expand the branch by double-clicking on the main item (GSM. .  Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type and on the measurement device. Click the Configure Colors button to access the Grid Color Configuration dialog. You can also select individual parameters. Select the parameters that you would like to view in the grid and click OK. the UMTS option. In the Selected tab you can view which parameters you have selected and change their order using the arrow buttons.

The new parameter is added to the list in the Layer Parameters dialog.242 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual User Parameters The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window or in graphs. After you have defined all the parameters. for example. Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK. Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded. Ordered MS power level. Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages. Click OK to exit the dialog. Click the Add button to define new parameters. click OK. expand the User Parameters item. . In the Parameters dialog. Click the User Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog.

The user can also perform more complex searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. to search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message. User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. for example.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 243 The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters. . It is possible.xml.

go to File | Export Settings in Nemo Outdoor. Next. Scroll to the User Parameters folder. . Select the ones you wish to export. The user parameters previously created are listed under the folder. The exported parameters will be saved on this file. and click OK. You can also select other items to be exported in the dialog.aex file on your PC. the Export Settings dialog appears. Save the .244 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Exporting/Importing User Parameters  Exporting user parameters It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. 2. To export user parameters. 1.

aex file that you saved earlier. select File | Import Settings in Nemo Outdoor. The selected user parameters and possible other items that you selected in the Export Settings dialog are now saved in the .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 245 3. 2. Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog. To import user parameters. .  Importing user parameters 1.

The user parameters are now saved and are shown in the Nemo Outdoor parameter tree under User Parameters. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. Click OK.  Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. Paths tab. After this. It is possible to view selected parameters in map by drag and dropping them in it. See page 333 for a description of the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons. First. the imported user parameter will replace it. If there already is a user parameter with the same name saved. VIEWING MAPS Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree.246 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. For information on Indoor measurements. right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu. refer to page 281. The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the popup menu when right-clicking on the map. . Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the User Interface Properties dialog.

or turning the color map to black and white. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Hover your mouse over the base station icon to see more information about the BTS. The corresponding image and .tab file contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular map. MapInfo Workspaces (*. . the current location of the test vehicle will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. The customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (. and the .tab.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor. the channel numbers for the antennas. the base stations will be displayed. you can define the current location manually. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16.nbf) for the measurement file. If there is no GPS connected to the system.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 247 If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system.id file.x of MapInfo Professional.tab file. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. and directions that the antennas point to. click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.tif.tab files for Raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map.gif. Note that each MapInfo® map has two files: an image file (. but can be saved as a .wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapX. the distance to the serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window. While viewing notifications on a map. This file (. the . When MapInfo raster maps are used. the BTS name will be truncated with “…” In this case. Also.  Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS. . The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. . This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all location-specific data. updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. .jpg) and a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset. The BTS icons display the antennas. such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location. If you select a BTS file (. there are three different files that need to be in the same directory. When using vector data for MapInfo®. The .gst) and loaded later on.mbx) that ships with version 5.map. If you are using a large map (size over 1 Mb). (Only for raster images). the image file is the actual map image file. Note that the BTS file is displayed only if there is a measurement file loaded on the map as well. hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.

248 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Side Panel .

When you right-click on a layer. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. the following popup menu appears: In the popup menu you can select whether or not you want to show or delete a layer. You can drag each view to different places on the map as well.263). When you double-click on the displaced view. If you have loaded a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map. and you can also add a new route or a new BTS file from the popup menu or directly from the Layers view. Double-click on an item to access its Properties dialog (see p. The Add route functionality is useful. and the item indicates a route plan. it will resume its original position in the side panel. when a multi measurement is loaded. You can also clear the option next to the layer item if you do not want to view it. You can also access the Properties dialog by right-clicking on the item and selecting Properties in the popup menu. the color legends will be shown next to one another in this view. Through the Properties item you can access the layer’s Properties dialog (see p. or dock it to another side of the map window following the arrows that appear when you drag the window. You can view three different kinds of items in the Layers view. See the Route Plans chapter below for more information on waypoints. The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 249 The contents of the map side panel depend on which items have been selected in the map popup menu. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. the item indicates a base station file connected to the measurement route. for example. Right-click on a map and select Color Legend. and Waypoints in the popup menu to view the three items above. See page 273 on how to create and edit color sets. and you want to view all the routes in the Layers view and all the color legends in the Color legends view. The Waypoints view is meant for controlling route plans.263). . or click on the X button next to the option to delete the layer. Layers. The item indicates a devicespecific measurement route on the map.

rpf). By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next. and is ready to be used in a measurement. you can save them as a custom window for later use. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (. Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline mode.rpf). In addition. You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode. you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in the map side panel. The route plan (. or alternatively you can open a map manually from Data | Map | New. . you can open it through the Open Route Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Open Route Plan from the popup menu. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views. or you can manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see page 39) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window. If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel.250 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Route Plans Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement.

and the Waypoints view is enabled. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle mode. The Show next waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a measurement. You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. A new route plan (. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu. the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items will also be disabled. . or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu. and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 251 You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the Show next waypoint option.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view.

and the previous waypoint on the route will automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. Reclick on Select to clear the functionality. . As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement. You can make changes to the route plan through the four buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view. the next waypoint on the route will be selected. In addition. Moreover.252 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Waypoint detection radius slide bar indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is selected. then select a waypoint on the map. the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. the selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted. and the Distance to next waypoint field will display the appropriate distance in meters to the next waypoint. the Delete button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map. If you click on Delete. The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current position on the route. click on the Select button in the Waypoints view. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. To select a waypoint on the map. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint on the route plan. the next waypoint is selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint.

Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon. If you click on either button when they are inactive. . or by selecting it in the map popup menu. they will both be activated. Creating and Saving Route Plans from a Measurement In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints. or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS coordinates. and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map. load a measurement file and open a map window. or select the option from the map popup menu.rpf”). then selecting a specific waypoint on the map. Right-click on the map and select View Entire Route. and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be enabled. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar. The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. The route plan should now be visible on the map. they will become inactive. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. you can create a route plan from a measurement. Start Nemo Outdoor. When you select either. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 253 You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select. you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan. and conversely if you click on either button when active. Click on the Move button. the layer list should have a new layer (“Untitled.

You will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window]. Note that when you click on Select. When you open the properties dialog. and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan during a measurement.254 Nemo O ut door User M a nual You can also modify the route plan with the Select. See page 250 for more information on how to use the control buttons. Saving a Route Plan to a Custom Window When you create a route plan and save it. Move.rpf). Change the settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel. Next. and save it. and you want to save these changes. . you may need to zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. double-click on the route plan in the map side panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all the circles. you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window. right-click on the map. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. change the properties and click OK. you need to save the map window as a custom window. First. Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel. and select Map | [name of custom window]. When you open a measurement the next time. However. if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific properties. the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File (. the properties should be what you set them to. and select Save As Custom Window in the map popup menu. create or open a route plan.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 255 Map Popup Menu Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above).jpg image. Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. . Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a . if you select LTE FDD. Save as MapInfo Tab-file Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format. For example.256 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement. Save as CSV File Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

In this way you have the possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. Save Route Plan The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (. you can open existing map files (. Open Map By selecting the Open Map item. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 257 Export to Google Earth By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route.kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking on the Browse button and browsing your local folders. Open Route Plan Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map. Add Waypoints Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually. Find Map at Position When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item. you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.rpf) for later use. Nemo Outdoor will view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. Create Route Plan The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window. notifications. colors based on selected parameter. Save Map By selecting the Save Map item. and base station information to Google Earth . See page 302 for more information on view groups.tab).

Note that this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel and the + and . Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. . Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow. It cannot be used during playback. Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. It cannot be used during playback. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. Tool Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.258 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Find Cell With Find cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.keyboard buttons. Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number.

Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu. for example. Previous View and View Entire Map With the Previous View command. because GPS fix was lost in a tunnel. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected. . View Entire Route By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map. Auto Clear Route The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is stopped.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 259 Auto Center The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. you can return to the previous map view. unselect the tool. Scale The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated. This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route. Modify Route With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. and the View Entire Map command displays the whole map. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement.

260 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The route will be displayed as dots. . Please note that you should maintain the correct order of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged. Drag and drop the dots into their new positions.

The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. Waypoints The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. To remove or edit individual comments. To remove all comments. right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool. Color Legend Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 261 When you have finished modifying the route. . right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments. Textual Comments With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Layers By selecting the Layers item you will be able to view all the layers of the map in the map side panel. You can create and save a route plan for later use.

. With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two points is used as the radius. The Total distance is displayed in the left-hand panel. Click the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map.262 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measure Distance Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 263 To remove points from the map. all the three items will be shown in the side panel. and if you activate any of these items. . click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. Full Screen Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. By clicking on the MapX Properties button you will enter the MapX Properties dialog (see p. the base station layer. if you start by activating the side panel.272). The Color Legend. you need to select a device in the drop-down menu on the Device page. and the route plan layer. Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of the measurement route. you will be able to view the side panel in the map window. Layers and Waypoints items can only be viewed in the side panel. Side Panel When Side Panel is selected. You can also access this dialog by doubleclicking on the device-specific route layer in the side-panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the devicespecific measurement route layer. In the case of multi measurements. Route Properties When a measurement route is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties. click the Measure Distance button. the Route Properties dialog appears. also the side panel will be shown along with the specific item. However. To hide the Measure Distance panel. Layer Properties The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in the map side panel.

The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. If you select the Draw thicker line when using high band option. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. . Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.264 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. When the Draw during pause option is deselected. If the Draw as dots item is selected. the route will be drawn thicker when the device is using the 1800/1900 band. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. the route is not drawn during when measurement is in pause.

select the Use color set option. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected. .  Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route. If you are measuring with a scanner. select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. also select the channels/pilots displayed by clicking the Select Channels/Select Pilots button. The entire route is drawn with the same color. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 265 On the Color page you can define route-specific line coloring. if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM. See page 273 for more information on defining color sets. For example. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. First. the system route is not drawn while in GSM. the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. the default color is not drawn. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

266 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual On the Notifications page select the Show notifications option to view notification icons on the map. . You can also define the notification icon size in pixels.

Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option. . Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. if you only want to draw a line from active system cell(s) to the test vehicle. Select the Show Active Cell Information option to display active base stations along with channel numbers and cell IDs.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 267 By selecting the Show Textual notes option on the Textual notes page. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and due to this reason. the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Instead. Define also the line Thickness and Color. If missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only. Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog. you will be able to view textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color for the note in the Text color and Background color fields. Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test vehicle. the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the terminal. See page 248 for more information. Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Please note that lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this feature. Select a BTS file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel. this information is not shown on the map. Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle. The Base stations page displays information on the open BTS files on the map. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. . If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e. You can also select the BTS file through this dialog. The other base stations are hidden. You can also view the dialog by double-clicking on the BTS file in the map side panel.General dialog. in other words. The Selected BTS cell color refers to neighbor cells that can be highlighted on the map if neighbor information is defined in a BTS file. Neighboring cells are highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but also with a bolded outline. UMTS and GSM). Note that you define a different color for active system base stations and for other base stations. the system in which the test device is currently. Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. The BTS file is selected in the Measurement Properties . The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell.. select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active system.g.268 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual BTS Properties When a base station file is selected in the map side panel. the BTS Properties dialog appears when Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu.

See page 273 for more information on how to edit and create color sets. Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base stations. Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 269 Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets. . and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. On the Cell info page you can choose what information is displayed from each base station.

The Connected Devices page displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites. Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected. . In the example below. all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.270 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information and define the Text color and Background color.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 271 The Cell Range page enables you to view cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell range transparency in the Cell Range transparency slide bar.

You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side panel. and select a file from the list. The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line attaching the icons together. . click the Open Map button. To later open the . Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.272 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Route Plan Properties When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties. Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel. MapX Properties Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.gst file.

. You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. To add layers on the map click Add. To remove layers from the map. and World map is at the bottom.. To edit an existing color set. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. double-click on the color set. You can also search for a color set by its name. in this case the Route layer is on the top.g. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. Current Position layer is under that..D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 273 If you are using MapInfo® maps.g. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map. of Helsinki) on top of that. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e. . In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. Color Set Editor You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties | Color dialog. you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of the current layers. for example. select the layer from the list and click the Remove button. With the Color Set Editor you can define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. or by double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M)..

274 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set. or string. Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with. Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them. numerical. select the color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. Finally click OK. . You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field. The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog. Name and Short name identify the color set. You can also write a description for the value range. In the Range Properties dialog. Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. gradient.

and Active set size in the Color Set field. and click OK. i. how many values are represented by the same color. In the Add Range dialog.e.. the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 275 Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the Active set size values. select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter field. In the Route Properties | Route dialog. Map Example 1 In the map below. . define the top and bottom values and the step. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values. Color page.

In the Measurement's Route Properties dialog. green means a low TX Power level and red a high level.276 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 2 In the map below. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the TX Power values. . Color page. In this color set. select TX Power in the Parameter and Color Set fields and click OK. the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set.

Click OK. On the Color page. . select the Use color set option. The Color Legend in the side panel displays the color codes for the EcNo values. and select Properties | Base stations. Select the Draw line to active base station. or right-click on the measurement layer and select Add BTS File. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again. In the Layer view in the map side panel. the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. click on Add BTS File.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 277 Map Example 3 In the map below. and EcN0 in the Color set field. and Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) options. select Ec/N0 (Active) in the Parameter field. Base station icons are displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations.

you will see the measurements in the Layers view. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page.278 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 4 In the map below. and their color sets in the Color legends view in the map side panel. You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. select the Use color set option. the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. and the route with the black current location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set. On the Route Properties | Color page. and MS Power Level in the Color set field. and MS Power Level in the Parameter field. Next. and now there should be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. In the Layers view click the Add Route button. Click OK. select the Use color set option. and Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field. . In addition. and select Properties. Right-click on the first measurement route and select Properties. or right-click on the existing measurement layer and select Add Route. In the Route Properties | Color page. right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view. Click OK. The route with the blue current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set.

and base station information to Google Earth . . Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button in the map window.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 279 Map Example 5 It is possible to export a map with measurement route. The Google Earth application needs to be installed for viewing the file.kml file. notifications. colors based on selected parameter.

Click Save.280 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual A Save As dialog appears. and type a name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. . Select a destination for the saved . The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.kml file in the Save in field. Note that you must have Google Earth installed on your laptop to view the file.

To move the markers on the map. It is possible to view selected parameters in indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. After this. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree.mrk) attached to the measurement file (.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 281 VIEWING FLOORPLANS Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. . click on Move and select a new destination for the marker. To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. select a marker in the Markers | Index field. First.nmf).

. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. or click on the Properties button in the Indoor map toolbar.282 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual On the map you can view. Multiple Routes and Floorplans You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. use the markers to draw the measurement route on the floor plan. The Route page enables you to define route line thickness in the Thickness field. you can switch between the color legends in the Color legends side panel. and go through the steps mentioned above. While you are performing the measurement and walking around in the building. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the side panel to add a route. you can right-click on the map and select Properties which views the properties dialog for the active layer. click with the Tablet PC pen on the screen and the marker will be placed there. In the Route Properties dialog that appears select a route in the Device drop-down menu. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. Click OK to exit the dialog. Alternatively. for example. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. The floorplan below has three routes. It is also possible to select a default color or parameter color set for the route in the Color page. a floorplan of the test site. two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window. If you are running Nemo Outdoor on the Microsoft XP Tablet PC Edition. You can make changes to a route by selecting a layer in the Layers view and double-clicking on it to view the layer properties dialog. In the Notifications page you can choose whether to view notifications on the map.

you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. for example. .rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 283 You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the Layers view. Indoor Route Planning Prior to conducting indoor measurements. indoor maps of different floors on the same building at once. A new route plan (. and clicking on the map. You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar.

284

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor maps. See page 250 for more information.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

285

Indoor Map Popup Menu
Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

286

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

Save as Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Save as MapInfo Tab-File
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Save as CSV File
Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

287

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 302 for more information on view groups.

Open Map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.

Import Map
You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as maps. Click the Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the popup menu. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you must define some map settings. Either define the dimensions in meters of the area visible on the map or define the GPS coordinates of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the map area.

Create Route Plan
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map window.

288

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Open Route Plan
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

Save Route Plan
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Add Waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Auto Center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

View Entire Map
The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route
The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

Textual Comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Show Minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

289

Show Marker Info
Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

Color Legend
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Show Markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

Show Layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.

Full Screen
Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

Route Properties – Indoor Map
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map. Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window.

290

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is paused.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

291

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the same color. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set button. First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See page 263 for more information on defining color sets. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if the route is colored based Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the route is not drawn while in GSM.  Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

292

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.

All the ongoing calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. 2. If you are performing measurements manually.E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 293 ENDING MEASUREMENTS The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main window.  When carrying out measurements using a script. it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. the measurement process is terminated either by selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. PDP context will be deactivated. . then select Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. stopping the measurement is not recommended while a test call is on. If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement. Data transfers will be stopped. select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of the Nemo Outdoor main window. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. you can either wait until the script file has been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. and GPRS detach will be performed. Always wait until the end of the call. If the measurement is stopped while the test call is on. You can also start a playback of this file.  To end the measurements: 1. 3. you can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. If you are using a script to perform the measurement. 10. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were. At this point.

The dialog displays some statistics from the measurement. click the Delete button. To delete the file without saving. To save the measurement file under another name. click Save. The filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder. you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button.294 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MEASUREMENT REPORT The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped.  Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard. click the Rename button and type a new file name in the field that appears. If you do not want this dialog to appear. Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel . . Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately.csv file. or click on the button on the dialog. select the Do not show this dialog again option. To save the file with the default name.

 Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze 5.X installed on the same computer where Nemo Outdoor is installed. In the Analyze Measurement dialog. the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze. If you do not select a workbook or a report.E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 295 Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze. . Finally click Upload. select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report template that is used for creating a report from the data.

Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices.nmf) Workspaces (. The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time.1. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. Nemo Outdoor will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback when you close the playback file(s). PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements.nmf where the number refers to the device number. The following file types can be opened by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer:      Measurements files (. with:      Nemo Outdoor Playback functions Nemo tool Nemo Analyze Text editor Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite Finland Ltd. If you change the file name manually. .worx) Hardware configurations (.tab.296 Nemo O ut door User M a nual MEASUREMENT RESULTS This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor. and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server. If you answer Yes. You can playback files anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on. The file name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part.gst) With Windows 7 it is required that Nemo Outdoor is launched with the "Run as Administrator" command. depending on whether you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. . Selecting Playback Files When you open a file for playback.hwcx) Maps (. for example. the file name format should be xxxx. ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed.

The Pause button pauses the playback. select File  Open Measurement. The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback. The Stop button stops the playback. With the Add Textual Note button you can add written remarks in the measurement file. In the dialog. If you have selected a multi measurement.M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 297 To open files for playback. . ending. The File Header box displays the measurement file header. the starting. 39 for more information on how to open measurement files for playback. that is. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement. you can look for a file by clicking the … button. The Play button starts the playback. and current time. you can still clear some of the files from playback. The same commands can be found in the Playback menu. During Playback The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. See also p. This will open up the following dialog.

select the Play command from the Playback menu or click the Play button on the tool bar. . Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers. After a file has been loaded. and all the other open windows will display the same point of time. Click on any of the markers in the grid window. The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements.298 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Viewing and Moving Markers You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during measurements.

Note that Nemo Outdoor must be in offline mode during the transfer. Place the red pin to the new location on the map. Closing Playback Files After playback.M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 299 Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button. Select File | Close Measurement. The new longitude and latitude information is saved in the marker file. If you saved the current device configuration when you started the playback. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load the same device(s). . as otherwise the modem ports required for the FTP transfer will be in use. you need to close the playback file. or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server when a measurement is stopped.

300 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Select File | Send Measurement to FTP Server. Click on the FTP Options button. Select one or more measurements in the Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog. . In the FTP Options dialog you can define the FTP Server and Proxy server settings.

M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 301 Under FTP Server you can define the FTP server address in the Server address field. The Username and Password fields will grant you permission to access the server. You can also select the Use passive mode option for the transfer. You can also change this default destination folder to another one in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements. After configuring the FTP settings. and the name of the folder to which the measurement files are sent on the FTP server in the Remote folder field. click OK. the Proxy address. the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. and when the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected. When you select the Use a Proxy Server option. The Measurement file(s) are sent to the FTP server. Username and Password fields will become active. . The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection or via a user-selected dial-up connection.

refer to your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation. To rename the default view group. VIEW GROUPS View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for easier viewing. To create a new view group. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. open a view group. You will find general descriptions on all the commands and windows. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. right-click on the tab and select Rename. The new view group appears as another tab. When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time. The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows® standards. and select Create New. Maps. Then go to another view group by clicking on the respective tab. Graphs and open measurement windows there. Now you can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.302 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual USER INTERFACE This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in the following sections. for example. If you are not familiar with these standards. for example. you will have one default view group. To organize measurement windows into the view groups. .

The shortcut keys are presented on the menus next to the menu commands. when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking). to start the measurement. the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function.USE R I NT ERF ACE 303 MENU BAR The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. . STATUS BAR The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending on the operations you are performing. while others will first display a dialog with options for you to select from. For example. TOOLBAR You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar. In the View menu. In the View menu. For example. this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window. The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks quickly. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement. See page 330 for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons. this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window. Some commands execute their respective operations immediately. The commands are arranged in menus. you can choose to hide the toolbar. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. A command ending in three dots (…) will open a dialog. Note that you can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. you can select to hide the status bar.

The following items are stored in the . The Work Offline item activates and deactivates the offline mode. File Menu The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations. Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu.299).304 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export. the current configuration is saved in a file and opened automatically the next time the program is started.aex file. With the Export and Import Settings items you can export and import settings into an . . The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send measurement files to an FTP server (see p.aex file:        Scripts Color sets Custom views Device configurations Notification settings Route plans Workspaces You can also export measurements. By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option.

you can select. status indicator. and device status. . User Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. those you wish to see on the screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the user. Recent Device Configurations. Edit Menu In the Edit menu. Color Set Editor. you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program. and Recent Measurements items display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files. output. See page 302 for more information on the view groups. The Active View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active window. The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid (see page 239). Through the View Groups item you can create new view groups or switch between existing view groups. With the Exit command you can close the program.USE R I NT ERF ACE 305 The Recent Workspaces. custom window toolbar. Notification Manager. respectively. View Menu In the View menu. hide and display items of the main window. such as the standard toolbar. You can also access the Configuration Manager.

For example. . These same commands can be executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button in the toolbar.306 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Menu Through the Measurement menu. Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. The Clear Buffers command will empty the event history buffer. In the Script Editor you can edit script files. you can make a voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor. The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. autodetect and remove devices. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. you can control the measurement process and add. This does not affect the measurement file.

The following functions can be found in this menu. and Script Properties (p. Notification Properties (p.151) dialogs can be accessed through this menu. The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements.66). Device Properties (p. if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it.USE R I NT ERF ACE 307 Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Measurement Properties (p. you can reset the Devices window. If you are using scripts to run measurements. By selecting the Reset command. for example. Through these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals. 70).58). you will not need these commands. Band Lock (page 173) Cell Barring (page 179) Channel Locking (page 169) Handover/Handoff Control (page 174) Missing Neighbor Detection (page 181) Cell Testing (page 180) Timeslot Testing (page 185) .73).  Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device. General Properties (p.

By right-clicking the Spectrum Graph item you are able to see the static line graph displaying spectrum scanning results. Playback Menu The Playback menu offers you commands for the playback of measurement data. Pause. You can also add markers and textual notes in the playback file. . it is possible to see the RX level for certain frequencies shown on the side panel. You can also access the Open Custom Window dialog (see p.308 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type. added or removed via edit marker window. With the Play. Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. If you select New. Data Menu Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. and Stop commands you can control the playback.315). By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window. Markers can be also edited. The same commands can also be executed by means of toolbar buttons.

). such as.g.USE R I NT ERF ACE 309 The Grid items offer a selection of grid types.. . system. The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see page 281). successes. For example. RLC/MAC. Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3. carrier. scrambling code. Events grids list. Table grids provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances. and LLC messages. Statistics grids list various statistics. the number of PDP context activation attempts. The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet capture files in playback mode. Parameters grids display selected network parameters. all measurement events but the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed. the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e. The Map item opens a map window (see page 246). and failures from the measurement. by default. etc.

The active window is marked with a check mark . From the About dialog you can also receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application. By selecting the License Information item. Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the program. you can check the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. Tile Horizontally. You can switch the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade. With the Close All command you can close all windows at once. and Arrange Icons commands.310 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Save as Custom Window… item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. The custom windows are presented on page 315. if you resize the windows. Help Menu The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics. Window Menu The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. For example. Tile Vertically. . including the contact information and the application version number. The Save Changes option saves changes to measurement windows.

to add new menus. To edit the contents of menus. right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and select Customize. Click the New button to create a new toolbar. In the New Toolbar dialog. or edit the toolbars.USE R I NT ERF ACE 311 CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. . type a name for the new toolbar and click OK. In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the corresponding options.

312 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories. Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the Delete button. Drag commands from the list to a toolbar or menu. .

.USE R I NT ERF ACE 313 To remove commands from a toolbar or menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content. select the toolbar or menu bar you want to restore and click the Reset button. drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or menu. open the Customize dialog (rightclick on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page.

. and select Change Button Image. For example. You can also change the icon for each toolbar button. right-click on a button.314 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations. Open the Customize dialog.

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph. etc. UMTS. indoor view) or by technology (AMPS. bars. GSM. . and dots. CDMA.).USE R I NT ERF ACE 315 NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Custom Windows Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window dialog (Data | Open Custom Window). Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows for specific types of measuring. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid types. Select the custom window you would like to open from the table on the right and click Open. They are also accessible through the parameter tree. To make the measuring process easier for first-time users. Different network parameters and events can be viewed as line graphs. The users are also able to make their own custom windows and save them for later use. grid. map.

316 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also save your own custom windows. select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button. that selected custom window will appear. parameter short names and possible alias names. If you want to remove some custom windows.e. and select a custom window from the list. activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom Window. Click OK. The next time you click on the same quick window button. HSDPA BLER search string matches. for example. After clicking OK. The Quick Windows bar (go to View. HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER. When you have set up a graph view that you would like to use later on. the window is added to the custom windows list. . In addition. Click on one of the quick windows. Parameter Tree Search Functionality A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters. and select Quick Windows) in Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.

you can select the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. you can access the related configuration dialogs. It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied to all selected devices. you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices. By doubleclicking the various items in the view.USE R I NT ERF ACE 317 Devices View The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs. The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. For example. When you have selected multiple devices. if the same APN is used with several devices. . double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog. For example.

SMTP.318 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Selected Data Protocol field.Measurement Settings page (p. 68) or GPS Properties (p. Measurement servers button opens the Measurement Servers dialog (p. 73) for the selected device. select the data protocol (FTP. Device connection settings button opens the Phone Properties (p.Notifications page (p. etc. Device measurement settings button opens the Measurement Properties .Script page (p. Scanner Properties (p. 101) for the selected device. Group devices by type/server button organizes the devices in the view. TCP/UDP. 69) dialog depending on the device selected. GPRS attach/detach. Note that this button is activated only if your Nemo Outdoor license includes the Nemo Invex option. The selection is device-specific. . Measurement settings button offers access to configuration and properties dialogs. 33) where you can connect to Nemo Invex servers. start/stop voice call. such as. SMS/MMS message sending.) used in the measurements. Device script settings button opens the Measurement Properties . 59) for the selected device. 66). Device notification settings button opens the Measurement Properties . Add or remove devices button opens a menu where you can choose to add a new device or remove the selected device. Measurement control button offers access to some commands that are supported by the selected device.

. The green light at the upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected.USE R I NT ERF ACE 319 Device Status View The Device Status view displays the device status.

320 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view. . Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK.

the speech bubble indicates a normal message. this window is also not available when making scanner measurements. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup menu. . You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main window. You can bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that window (except for the Minimize.USE R I NT ERF ACE 321 Output Window The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. You can also bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top left corner of the window). For example. Controlling Windows You can have several windows open at the same time. and closing functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. and Close buttons in the top right corner). Icons ( ) next to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. Script Status Window  Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. the orange flag a warning. The minimizing. the red flag an error message. and the exclamation mark a notification. Cascade Windows The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current measurement. The active window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows® Control Panel to indicate an active window (see your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation). maximizing. Maximize.

it can be seen from the HSDPA link adaptation information table grid. E. starting from the left side. select the Arrange Icons command in the Window menu. in the example below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu..322 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Tile Windows The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side. graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample duration which is set to 200ms.g. E. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. To do this.g. . four percentage of the time during the sample duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits. Arrange Icons The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the main window. HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW In the bar below. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red. If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed. Close All The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Saving Window Settings If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor. Clicking the command will result on a check mark . the second click will remove the mark. filling the whole space so that all windows are visible at the same time.

USE R I NT ERF ACE 323 .

observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity. in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. PRB affects throughput directly. For example. keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. typically 10-20%. read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference.   . In LTE networks. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. Also try different servers.324 Nemo O ut door User M a nual TROUBLESHOOTING This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Try another FTP server for comparison. Other things that could help troubleshooting:    Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Does not work manually. the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation. average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0. In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications. For Nemo Outdoor 5. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. LOW THROUGHPUT In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications. Command prompt FTP throughput. script is always needed. For better results. server or transmission problems. Works also manually. For Nemo Outdoor 5. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell.

A measurement file (. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Check the . Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function. Set to default.pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.): 1. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Window shows the current value. help desk.    TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 325 All Windows Versions  How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: 1. Window size not set.nmf) does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used. Using debug logs (for developers. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window. etc. . Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor. Look at the Tcp tree. TCP Auto-Tuning detected. 2. 12. Using Nemo Outdoor: 1. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0: 11.

They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature.326 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Windows XP Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. If TCP auto-tuning is disabled. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software. This registry entry can be removed. However. if the same registry value that XP uses is set. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. . Right-click and select Run as administrator.40 and later checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global” 3. 2. Outdoor 5.  How to check TCP auto-tuning state: 1. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state. Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. 4. If the registry value is missing. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. In most cases. Windows Vista/Windows7 Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry.  Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

restricted: Recommended. 6. 7. highlyrestricted: Recommended. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. Limits to 64 KB (65535). However. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 327 5. . Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:      disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. It enables receive window values of over 16 MB. it can degrade performance in common scenarios. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses. only intended for research purposes). type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value. very conservatively. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. normal: Default value. Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled.

If a green light is blinking. Please. playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).328 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual DEVICE STATUS VIEW The Device Status view displays the device status. rightclick on the device in the Devices view and select Reset. your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Also. If the copy protection dongle is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated. Connect the device. it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is functioning normally. check that recording is not on. it means that the device has been disconnected. CANNOT ADD DEVICES If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo Outdoor. . If a red light is blinking. see page 13 for more information on copy protection.

check that you have devices online. 3. Double-click on Mice and other pointing devices. 1. However. 4. PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS The Windows® XP and Vista operating systems sometimes confuse a GPS receiver with the computer’s mouse. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback. The last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.1.262. Double-click on System."0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0" Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5. The mouse device is now disabled and the GPS device can be reconnected. #HASH. The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where modification is detected. 5. follow the steps below. Go to the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button. 6. When this occurs. . Select Start | Settings | Control Panel.50 or later.14:46:49. MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the measurement is stopped. A Microsoft Serial BallPoint device should appear. the mouse stops working correctly. The Work offline or online button should be unselected.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 329 CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu . Confirm the disabling by clicking Yes in the message box. In this case. measurement files are still opened normally. Right click on the Microsoft Serial BallPoint device and select Disable from the popup menu. 2.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.

Opens the Open Custom Window dialog. Switches the offline mode on and off. Saves the current workspace configuration. Nemo Outdoor starts writing a file of the current measurement. Pauses the playback/recording. Switches a script on/off. Saves changes to the active custom window. Starts the playback with the selected files. Adds a marker in the measurement file or on the Indoor map. Saves the active window as an image file (. Stops the playback/recording.jpg). Title Open Playback File(s) Button Description Opens an existing measurement for playback Opens an existing workspace file.330 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Opens the Configuration Manager dialog. Saves the active window as a new custom window. Open Workspace Save Workspace Configuration Manager Work Offline Start Recording Start Playback Pause Stop Start/Stop Scripts Add Marker Add Textual Note Open Custom Window Save As New Custom Window Save Changes to Custom Window Save As Image . Adds a textual note in the measurement file.

Title Expand Device Info Window Device notification settings Button Description Displays the selected device info parameters in the Device Info window. or script depending on the item selected in the Configuration Manager. Updates information in the Configuration Manager. Adds a new device. Through the Device Commands button you have access to various mobile specific functions. Automatically detects devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. event trigger. Removes the selected device. or script from the Configuration Manager. Offers access to several dialogs.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 331 DIALOG BUTTONS These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor. event trigger. Opens a Properties dialog for the selected item in the Configuration Manager. Device Commands Device Settings Autodetect Devices Refresh Properties Add Remove . Opens the Notifications dialog where you can select the events of which Nemo Outdoor will display or play a notification.

Title Hide Layer Button Description Hides the selected layer in the graph Remove Layer Removes the selected layer New Layer Opens the New Layer dialog where you can configure a new layer to be added in the active graph. in separate graphs. that is. you can view them in stacked mode. Moves the selected layer down in the layer view Moves the selected layer up in the layer view If there are two or more layers in a graph. Displays the info panel with numerical values on the right side of the graph.332 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs. Layer Properties Move Layer Down Move Layer Up Set Stacked Mode Autoscroll Show Panels . When the button is pressed down. Opens the Layer Properties dialog where you can edit an existing layer. the graph is scrolling automatically as the measurement proceeds.

Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually. Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File (. Available only in the Indoor map.gst). Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing bitmap images as floorplans. Saves the current map layers and settings into a MapInfo Geoset file (.rpf). Through this item you can open saved route plans. Creates a route plan from an open measurement.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 333 MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps. Place the hand on the map. Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you can configure the layer properties. Title Open Map Button Description Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file. With the automatic map find feature the user can easily locate all maps from same location. Save Map Import Map Layer Properties Find Map at Position Create Route Plan Open Route Plan Save Route Plan Add Waypoint Arrow Pan Center . Changes the cursor into the center tool. which you can use for dragging the map to a different position. Changes the cursor into an arrow. which you can use for selecting items. which you can use for selecting a point on the map on which the map view will be centered. Changes the cursor into a hand. Keep the left mouse button pressed down and move the map.

Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in the map window. Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map after zooming in. Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass.334 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Zoom In Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass. if you have moved the map with the Pan tool. for example. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the distance on the map in kilometers between multiple points. With the Entire Route button you can view the whole route on the map. It cannot be used during playback. The higher the percentage. With the Auto Center tool activated. the map view will always center on the test vehicle. This button is active only during measurements. which you can use for zooming out on the map. This requires that a GPS receiver is used. The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto Center tool. Click the Previous View button to return to the previous map view. It cannot be used during playback. That this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. which you can use for zooming in on the map. Zoom Out Clear Route Set Current Location Auto Center Auto Center Sensitivity Previous View Entire Map Entire Route Scale Bar Measure Distance . Clears the measurement route from the map. the sooner the map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves around on the route.

NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 335 Side Panel Activate the Side Panel button to view the side panel in the map window. .

.336 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SHORTCUT KEYS This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.

NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS 337 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS Below are described the default notification symbols. Attach Attempt Attach Failed Attach Success MMS Receiving Attempt MMS Receiving Failed MMS Receiving Success MMS Sending Attempt Call Alerting Call Answered Call Attempt Call Connected Call Disconnect Call Dropped Call Failed Call Received Packet Call Attempt Packet Call Connected Packet Call Disconnected Packet Call Failed Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA Packet Technology Changed to UMTS Cell Change Attempt Cell Change Failed Cell Change Success Cell Reselection Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM RX Level Low/Bad Routing Area Update Attempt Routing Area Update Failed Context Activation Attempt Context Activation Failed Context Activation Success Context Deactivation Semiduplex Call Attempt Service Lost Routing Area Update Success PTT Idle PTT Receiving PTT Transmitting MMS Sending Failed MMS Sending Success .

338 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Service Received Data Call Attempt Data Connection Attempt Data Connection Failed Data Connection Success Data Disconnect Data Transfer Attempt Data Transfer Success Data Transfer Failed Soft Handover Failure Soft Handover Success SMS Received SMS Receiving Attempt SMS Receiving Failed SMS Sending Completed Dead Reckoning in Use Detach Differential GPS in Use Duplex Call Attempt FER High TX Power High/UL Power Up High Video Call Attempt Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt (ETSI) Voice Call Connected (ETSI) Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI) GPS Fix Lost GPS Fix Received HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed Voice Call Dropped (ETSI) Star Thumb Down Handover Attempt Handover Failed Handover Success Thumb Up Location Area Update Attempt Location Area Update Failed Location Area Update Success .

NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS 339 Marker Markov Call Attempt Measurement Error .

please contact our Nemo Outdoor technical support service at Nemo. you will automatically receive e-mails informing you each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast.com. 24 hours a day. After submitting the requested information.Helpdesk@anite. USER CLUB The Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. Once you are registered with our User Club.com or call +358 50 395 7800. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support. but you are without access to the user club. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements.com/nemo. When faxing or emailing. INTERNET SUPPORT At our web site http://www. easy.340 Nemo O ut door User M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo Outdoor. please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Support Agreement.anite. PHONE. If you have questions relating to the Nemo User Club.helpdesk@anite. . and it is available to you seven days a week. AND FAX SUPPORT During the warranty period. Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements or partner agreements. you can find all the frequently asked questions about Nemo Outdoor. among other information.com/nemo. please complete an on-line registration form. Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement. please e-mail us at nemo.anite. you will receive a personal access key and password by email in a few days time. You can find it at our WWW site http://www. the phone and fax support related to potential software errors is free of additional charge. EMAIL.

see Help | About  Device handler versions  Your description of the problem  Whether you were able to repeat the problem  The corresponding measurement results file (as email attachment or on disc) ..g.com +358 50 395 7800 +358 8 551 6182 Anite Finland Ltd Kiviharjunlenkki 1 D 90220 Oulu Finland Americas Email Mobile Fax Address nemo.NEM O O UTDO O R S UP PO RT 341 Please contact us at the following locations: Global Email Tel. Fax Address nemo. Nokia 6720)  GPS receiver type (e.R.x). Garmin GPS II Plus)  Your Nemo Outdoor version and build (e. Beijing 100022 China When contacting us for problem reporting. Fax Address nemo.com +65 9746 2431 +65 6254 9885 Anite Singapore Pte. Lenovo)  Your test mobile types (e.com +1 469 951 9105 +1 469 774 4608 (En español e português) +1 972 462 1640 Anite Inc. 101 Thomson Road. Fax Address nemo.helpdesk@anite. China Email Tel.helpdeskt@anite. No. 21st Floor The Exchange Beijing.helpdesk@anite. 6225 N.helpdesk@anite. Ltd.com +86 10 6567 8528 +86 10 6567 8521 Anite Wireless Trading (Beijing) Limited. #20-05 United Square Singapore 307591 P. Version 5.g. Windows® XP). TX 75038 USA APAC Email Tel. State Hwy 161 Suite 425 Irving..g.g.g. see Windows® Control Panel | System  Your computer brand model (e. Jianguo Road Chaoyang District. Yi 118. please supply/inform us of:  Your Windows® version number (e.xx.. Room 2109...

If possible. . 2. see the setup guide included in the converter product package.  To install a PCMCIA serial I/O card: 1. The COM port number is important.  Use the COM ports created with the PCMCIA serial card for GPS receivers and/or scanners. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot. If you are using a USB serial converter. When the update is complete or if you have installed the I/O drivers earlier.342 Nemo O ut door User M a nual APPENDIX 1 INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD This appendix describes how to install a PCMCIA serial I/O card to create additional COM ports for your computer. 4. You should now be able to see the installed driver and the COM port it is using. as you need to define it in the Nemo Outdoor configuration settings. select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). If you have not installed the I/O drivers. the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. 3. always use the fixed COM ports of your computer to connect the test devices. Restart your computer.

dual. and Quad.APPE NDI X 2 343 APPENDIX 2 You can have three kinds of Socket cards: single. . After you have installed the dual socket card drivers. you can check the COM ports from My Computer | Control Panel.

5. . If you have not installed the socket I/O drivers. After restarting. plug the GPS receiver in to the PCMCIA card cable. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot. The ports can be used for connecting the GPS receiver and the Scanner. Open the Configuration Manager dialog and detect the GPS receiver either manually or using the Autodetect function. CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET This appendix describes how to connect the GPS receiver to the computer when using PCMCIA socket. respectively). Start Nemo Outdoor.344 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By double-clicking on the Socket Dual I/O icon the Socket Dual I/O Properties dialog is opened. do it at this point.  To connect the GPS receiver to the computer’s PCMCIA socket: 1. The First Port Name and Second Port Name display the COM ports used by the socket card (in this example COM3 and COM6. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. 2. 3. select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). You should now be able to see the installed driver and also the COM port it is using. When the update is complete or if you have installed the socket I/O drivers earlier. If you need to restart your computer. 4.

Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. you can display it in a map window. Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected. photographs.GIF.PCX . . then you must register the raster map image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. By doing this.TIF . 2.BMP .TIF. you can bring paper maps. MapInfo® supports 256 colors.filename.filename. The Image Registration Dialog is displayed. the default value is Longitude/ Latitude. If you do not know the right projection.JPG) and open it. the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map images.JPG . Start the MapInfo® software.filename. Select your raster map image file (.JPG formats.GIF.APPE NDI X 3 345 APPENDIX 3 MAKING MAPINFO® RASTER MAPS Using raster image files. . Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors.  To register a raster map: 1.filename.GIF . Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support . You do this in the Image Registration Dialog. and other graphic images into MapInfo®. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you create in MapInfo®. MapInfo® can read the following types of raster images: . . It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster map image. we recommend using gray scale images.filename.BIL Color options are: Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.TIF. such as street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze. and . You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. white. Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file. . or a shade of gray.filename.

You must choose at least three control points. if you are registering a UTM map image. 7. Start adding control points. The raster map will be displayed in the map window.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. Using the MapBasic® program. click OK in the Image Registration dialog. Move filename. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). 5. 30 minutes. enter coordinates in meters.346 Nemo O ut door User M a nual 3.tab and filename. you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format. Select points that can be easily identified and selected in the map window. enter 65. If you want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. The Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels.5 degrees.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. For example. Add Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. 6. . or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees 4. to specify the coordinates 65 degrees. For example. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. Open filename. After all control points have been defined. specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog.

APPE NDI X 5 347 APPENDIX 4 CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device Settings . Directory number defines a phone number . A known SPC can also be overwritten by this plugin. In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items. You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings.

. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.348 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal MIN2 defines a three-digit area code SPC defines the service programming code IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2 On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features. This can be used to load any previously saved PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile.

This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel. . 1. The download page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using the search tool on the main page. you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from CDG. Click on the prltools. From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it.org.APPE NDI X 5 349 Should you need to manually edit a PRL. 2. Install the suite when launched.asp link to get to the downloads page.

Click Next in the Welcome window. Run the Setup. It should look as follows in Excel: . 4. 7. 6. open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog. Next.exe file. 5. Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears. and click Next.350 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. 9. Click Install in the dialog that appears. 8. Click Next to confirm installation. Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog.

and a GPS device. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a car’s +12VDC power output. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional ruggedized rollaround carrying case. . With the high-quality Neutrik USB connectors and the professional lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use.APPE NDI X 5 351 APPENDIX 5 NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION  Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop. and the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers simultaneously while connected to a single laptop. The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on different system technologies and networks with support for up to seven test devices such as mobiles. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop. These two options are elaborated on below. scanners. Nemo Outdoor Multi can be delivered with or without the carrying case. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator.

. Common Components Carrying case Mobile holder panel. test terminals The mobile holder panel is by default attached to the lid of the multi carrying case. With the carrying case option. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered without the case. on the car back seat. for example. only some of the common components will be included in the package.352 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Nemo Outdoor Multi comes in two options: with or without the case. all of the common components listed below will be included. but can also be semi-permanently mounted into a test vehicle.

In the latter instance. see page 360. or it can also be used without the carrying case.APPE NDI X 5 353 MMAC3 unit The MMAC3 unit is placed on the bottom layer of the carrying case. . Mounting plate The MMAC3 unit is attached to the mounting plate and placed either in the multi carrying case or alternatively can be attached to a location in the test vehicle.

The inverter should be connected directly to the car battery. The inverter converts +12V into +110V or +220V depending on the requirements of the market area.354 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Mascot 12V Pure Sine Wave Inverter The inverter provides power for the laptop on which Nemo Outdoor is running. or it may overheat! . The operating voltage of the inverter is a constant +12V. or alternatively for an Anritsu scanner or for any other device which uses the 110 or 220 voltage.  Note that the inverter should be taken out of the carrying case when in use.

2) are meant for the Multi carrying case and two for the MMAC3 unit (3. .APPE NDI X 5 355 Power cables Nemo Outdoor Multi comes with four external power cables.4).12 ft) Function: Enables the Multi carrying case to be connected to the car 12V socket. Product code Cable External power cable description Length: 4m (13.40 ft) Function: used when multi carrying case unit is used for fixed installation in a test vehicle. Both the carrying case and the MMAC3 unit have one cable to attach the unit to the car 12V socket. 1046-C-025 1041-C-040 Length: 5m (16. The MMAC3 cables are only needed if you want to mount the MMAC3 unit into the car instead of keeping it in the carrying case. Two of the cables (1. 1041-C-038 Length: 4m (13. it is directly connected to the connector panel of the multi carrying case. and one cable for fixed installation in the test vehicle. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector. If the MMAC3 unit is placed in the carrying case.12 ft) Function: is used to connect the MMAC3 unit to the car 12V socket when you want to use the MMAC3 without the carrying case. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector.

Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for more details. Optional components Scanner It is possible to use one PCTEL EX or PCTEL EX mini scanner at a time with Nemo Outdoor Multi. If the scanner has been delivered with the carrying case. .12 ft) Function: You can use this external power cable for the MMAC3 unit for fixed installation in a car in instances when you want to use the MMAC3 unit without its carrying case. Laptop The Nemo Outdoor Multi system runs on a single laptop with Nemo Outdoor installed on it. and connected to the MMAC3 USB port. The car 12V socket provides a constant +12V.356 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 1041-C-039 Length: 4m (13. it will come mounted into the case. The laptop is connected to the sine wave power inverter. The power inverter converts 12V to 110V or 220V depending on the requirements of the market area.

so not part of the default package. Lid The case lid holds the mobile holder panel. and a middle panel divides the case into two parts. . The optional components remain optional. The MMAC3 carrying case consists of three main parts: lid. MMAC3 WITH CASE When Nemo Outdoor Multi is purchased with the carrying case. the mobile holder panel is covered with soft padding which has openings for the test terminals. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered with the carrying case option. top level and bottom level. However. onto the test vehicle back seat. the mobile holder panel can alternatively also be removed from the lid and semi-mounted. all of the common components mentioned above are included. for example. External antennas The external antennas can be placed on the middle panel which has a special magnet board to keep them in their place. When attached to the lid.APPE NDI X 5 357 USB Soundcard for Voice Quality measurements If you have purchased a TerraTec USB sound card with your Nemo Outdoor Multi. please refer to the Voice Quality guide for further instructions. it is possible to use external antennas. The test terminals are mounted onto the terminal holder panel. and grooves on the inside leading the cables into the case and to the MMAC3 unit.

Both the MAIN POWER and MMAC3 POWER switches must be turned on when the Multi system is in use. Please remember to connect the data cable to same USB port in the laptop after its initial installation. the optional scanner or optional USB soundcard for Voice Quality measurements. The switch also provides power for the optional scanner. MMAC3 unit uses its internal back-up battery.358 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The mobile holder panel can support up to six test terminals which can be secured in place with the help of Velcro tapes. This way the MMAC3 unit with its devices are connected to the car power source and with the laptop PWR CONNECTOR is meant for the Nemo Outdoor Multi main external power cable. depending on whether it is to be connected to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. Connector Box  The MMAC3 POWER switch turns on the MMAC3 unit. However it makes it possible to measure up to approximately 45-60 minutes without external power supply.  Note that the lid must always be open when performing measurements. or otherwise the system may overheat. If only MMAC3 POWER switch is turned on. The USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors are meant for external devices such as the GPS devices. The back-up battery is intended for short power failures. Most of the time it is recommended that both the MMAC3 POWER and the MAIN POWER switches are turned on when the Multi system is in used.     . The Nemo Outdoor application supports up to five test mobiles at the time of printing this manual. The MAIN POWER switch turns on the Multi system when it is connected to either the car +12V socket or the car battery. There are two cables available in the system. The MMAC3 unit with the test terminals and other devices connected to it are connected to the MMAC3 USB connector’s other end underneath the connector box. The MMAC3 USB connector is connected to the laptop USB port with a USB data cable.

The straps can be tightened. 3) Straps for holding cables in place during the transportation of the carrying case. Bottom level Below the middle panel you will find the following items: 1) MMAC3 unit 2) Optional USB soundcard for voice quality measurements 3) Optional scanner 4) Test terminal car chargers 5) Lockable USB bushings for the test terminal data cables Top level The top level holds the following items: 1) Mascot DC to AC 12V pure Sine Wave Inverter for the laptop 2) Magnet board for external antennas.APPE NDI X 5 359 Carrying case The Multi measurement system comes divided into two levels by a middle panel. .

360

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

4) You can lift the middle panel by the handles on the left- and right- hand sides of the carrying case.  Note that you should use separate cigarette lighter sockets in the car for the MMAC3 multi unit and for the laptop, otherwise the car fuse risks burning.

MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE

The MMAC3 unit can also be delivered on its own, without the case. In this case the components included in the package are as follows.

MMAC3 unit

The MMAC3 unit is placed on the mounting plate. See below.

APPE NDI X 5

361

Mounting plate

Belt

The belt holds the MMAC3 unit in its place on the mounting plate.  Note that the belt is no longer included in the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi package.

USB A to USB B data cable

362

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

External power cable

Screws

USB bushing

APPE NDI X 5

363

Mobile holder panel

Item 1. MMAC3 unit 2. Mounting plate 3. Belt 4. USB-A to USB-B cable 3 m 5. External power cable 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16 7. Hex Nut DIN 985 M4 8. Screw DIN 7981C 4.2x16 9. USB bushing 10. Mobile holder panel

Code MMAC3 1041-P-00 1041-P-01 1041-C-038 1041-P-033 800-0324-818

364

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION
Without Carrying Case
The graph below shows the different components of the MMAC3 system.

Compiling the MMAC3 system
1. Attach the screws (see above, 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16) in the holes shown below. This enables you to attach the MMAC3 unit on a surface in the test vehicle.

APPE NDI X 5

365

13. Place the MMAC3 box into the mounting plate.

14. The MMAC3 unit is now ready to be used once all the cables and test devices have been attached to it.

366

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

With Carrying Case
 Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use, otherwise it may risk overheating! Below you will see the system in a graph.

APPE NDI X 5

367

Compiling the MMAC3 system
1. Open the case locks. There are a total of six locks on three sides of the carrying case. Lift the clasp and turn it to open the case.

15. Connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to a power source in the car. There are two ways of connecting the Multi system to a power source in the car: either to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. These two options are listed below. a) Non-fixed installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to the car 12V socket using the external power cable with the code 1046-C-025 (see cable 1 on p. 355.). Connect the plug of the power cable to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the plug until it locks to place. Next, connect the cigarette lighter end of the cable to the car 12V socket. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it out.

368

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

b) Fixed Installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system directly to the vehicle battery. Connect the cable plug (code 1041-C-040) to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the cable until it locks to place. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the plug until it is released and you can pull it out. Attach the other end of the cable to the car battery.

16. Connect the possible optional USB devices such as GPS, second scanner etc to the USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors. 17. The GPS antennas are placed on the vehicle roof in order to maximize the RF qualities of the antenna. The middle panel contains an iron board which is meant for the antennas. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the roof corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz 800 MHz 900 MHz  = 66 cm (25.98”)  = 37 cm (14.56”)  = 33 cm (12. 99”)

1800 MHz  = 17 cm (6.69”) 1900 MHz  = 16 cm (6.29”) 2100 MHz  = 14,5 cm (5.7”) GPS antenna 1565- 1575 MHz  = 19 cm (7.48”)

With a GPS antenna, distance from the corner is not important. However, especially within the following frequency range 1800- 1900 MHz, the mobile antennas can interfere with the GPS receiver.

 . Take the Mascot DC to AC power inverter out of the carrying case and place it on a steady surface in the vehicle. It is possible to use external antennae with the carrying case. Turn on the Multi system. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the internal back up battery power source. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. The MMAC3 Power switch provides power solely for the MMAC3 unit. When the light is off. Bring the cables from the antennas into the vehicle. it means that the device is off. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. in which event the antennas are attached directly to the test terminals. Connect the power cable that came with it directly to the car battery.APPE NDI X 5 369 Place all antenna away from roof racks or any other obstructions. Place the middle panel back in the carrying case. Be careful not to pinch the cables with metal parts in any way that would damage them.    Green light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty. 18. The Main PWR switch provides power for the whole system when the system is connected to the vehicle. 19.

. All drivers can be found on the CD that comes with the delivery. When tightening the screw the USB cable with the bushing is locked in place to the MMAC3 unit. 22. Attach one end of the data cable to a port in the laptop and the other to the MMAC USB port. Especially when the installation process is done for the first time. and the USB cable inserted in the USB connector in the MMAC3 unit. install also the driver that comes with the scanner before connecting the USB data cable to the laptop. Once installation with the first terminal is done proceed with next one until all terminals and test devices are installed. The bushing is closed with screws. If the optional scanner is included and reassembled inside the carrying case. Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further instructions on how to connect each phone to the computer (via the MMAC3 unit) and on how to set up a dial-up connection and add the device to Nemo Outdoor on the laptop. Connect the PC to the MMAC3 USB connector using the B data cable. See the phone’s manual for further instructions on how to do this. Each phone’s USB cable is secured in a bushing which keeps the data cable securely in place.370 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 20. where you should be able to see the Generic USB Hub under Universal Serial Bus controllers. Connect the test terminals to the MMAC3 box and to the laptop. Check that each phone has a SIM card in it and that the battery is in place. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware. 21. Connect the test terminals to the USB connectors in the MMAC3 unit one by one. 23. it is a lot easier to handle the installation process one terminal at a time. Windows will automatically recognize the device. If the system was purchased without a laptop it is recommended to install all required drivers for all test devices.

3. Next. Plug in the USB data cable to a USB port in the MMAC3 unit. pull out the data cable from the USB port. 5. not for scanners! If a scanner is connected with the socket.  Note that these power sockets are meant solely for test terminal use.APPE NDI X 5 371  Removing data cable with USB bushing from MMAC3 1. 2. Use a torx screw to tighten and lock the data cable to the MMAC3 unit. 2. Next. install the top part of the USB bushing to the USB port and if needed use a bit of force to press it together with the lower part. See the Nemo Voice Quality Guide for further instructions on how to set up the voice quality system. 4. After that. The optional soundcard can be connected. On the back side there are two USB connectors: one USB B connector which is already connected to the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel. it can be used for other USB devices as well. . Unscrew the Torx screw.  Installing data cable with USB bushing to MMAC3 1. pull out the lower part of the USB bushing and store the parts to a secure place for future use. and the other which is a USB A connector meant primarily for the optional scanner. Please tighten the screw as tight as possible till the connection is secure. If you have purchased an optional scanner. Pull out the screw and pull out the top part of USB bushing. the fuse risks overheating. However. for example. and press the data cable from the top so that the data cable fits inside the lower part of the USB bushing as shown in the picture above. to the laptop. The MMAC3 unit has six USB A connectors at the front for terminals. Nemo Outdoor Multi is now ready to be used for measurements. the GPS device and the optional scanner. The MMAC3 unit is connected to the laptop through the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel. Install the lower part of the USB bushing to the USB port. please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for instructions on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator. bump and shock) vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC. The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III . the system in combination with the Nemo Outdoor Multi -option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls.0.0 compliant ports (Out) Main Power Switch/LED Neutrik +12V Lockable Power Connector (NL2MP)  Complies with the following standards   300 019-2-5 V3. a scanner and a sound card. The system is connected to a single laptop. it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. In addition. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/USB modems. Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications  Interfaces     One USB 2.0 class T5.1 standard (random.0 compliant B port (In) Seven USB 2. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.372 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 6 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL  Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop.

35 1.7 2.APPE NDI X 6 373    IP Rated: IP67 EN60529:1991 IEC60529:1989   Lockable USB data cable connections Automatic Pressure Equalization Valve Power Specification    Input: +12VDC nominal (11.2 4.7 Charging phone via USB x 4 Charging phone via USB x 5 4.7 .8V DC (11.05 Charging phone x 4 4.2 Charging phone via USB x 3 3.45 Charging phone x 3 4.65 Charging phone x 5 5.25 Charging phone x 6 5.3V DC Configuration No devices No devices TerraTec Charging phone x 1 Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via car charger 2 Nokia terminals charged via car charger 3 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 4 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 5 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 6 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers Not charging Charging Charging phone x 2 3.8A/socket or total 5A Back-up battery capacity: Li-ion 2500 mAh Operating mode Required power (A) 0.85 Note Input Voltage +12V DC Minimum operating voltage +11.85 No devices No devices TerraTec Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via USB port 2 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 3 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 4 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5 Nokia terminals charged 0.7 USB data cable must be connected to PC.15VDC range).7 2.35 1. Otherwise USB charging does not work Charging phone via USB x 2 3.3V DC measured) Charging phone via USB x 1 2.2 2. max 8A Outputs: +12VDC: 0.2 Not charging Charging Minimum operating voltage +10.3 .

bit) or Windows® Vista (32 bit) For multi data and voice quality measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. and only after that on the PC (e.5 minutes “Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI.00GHz or higher 512MB RAM minimum.26GHz or higher required . Measurement time with back up battery without sound card with six terminals ~20 minutes  Note that if the same power source is shared with Multi Lite and the PC.2 Measurement time with back up battery with sound card and six terminals ~3.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. Computer Requirements       PC (IBM or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP Professional (32 .g. the power should always be turned on first in the Multi unit. 1GB recommended For up to four channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals “Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI.. if a +12V cigarette lighter socket is used as power source). Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals.374 Nemo O ut door User M a nual via USB ports Charging phone via USB x 6 6 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5. 1GB RAM recommended 100MB of free hard disk space for installation and use.

7 x 17.1 cm .9 x 32.APPE NDI X 6 375 Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components Case Pelican case 1520  Interior 45.

89" x 6.7lbs) (without test terminals and antennas) Lid organizer   Place for CD. USB extension cable (max. antennas. etc.77" x 7.376 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual (18. 3m). 2pcs Fan .41")  Weight ~ 10.72")  Exterior 50. dongle.2 x 40 x 18.8 cm (19.78" x 15. 4 pcs Movable holders with hinge.06" x 12.3kg (22. Gas spring Middle part     Place for up to six terminals Fixed holders.

0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card (optional) .APPE NDI X 6 377 Bottom part      2500mAh back-up battery PCB/Charger Cigarette lighter sockets Industrial seven port USB 2.

.378 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Exterior  Carbine hooks (2pcs) Optional components   Scanner Sound card Laptop with Nemo Outdoor  Note that from version 5. Nemo Outdoor requires a new dongle which cannot be used with any previous versions of Nemo Outdoor.4 onwards.

  Note that you should make sure that the PC meets the computer requirements mentioned above. Connect the Multi Lite power cable to the power connector next to the power switch on the connector panel. lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released. sound card and scanners have been installed. 7. only focus on driver installation. . 4. Similarly. Refer to the separate Nemo Scanner Guide and to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide documents for instructions. Switch on the Multi unit from the connector panel. Insert the copy protection dongle attached to the case lid organizer to your computer. turn on the PC and run the Nemo Outdoor installation CD. push and turn it to the left until it locks to place. Even though the Multi unit can derive power from the laptop. 8. Connect the USB extension cable to the USB data cable coming from USB hub. 5. and the other end to the PC (max. so there is no need for you to access the bottom part of the case. Next. you will need to set up and connect your test devices with Nemo Outdoor. Note that prior to connecting the test devices to the PC. and pull it up. you will receive the system semiconfigured. 2. This means that the data and audio cables as well as the optional sound card have been set up for you. In the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide you will find terminal-specific instructions regarding the drivers. Connect the other end of the cable to the car +12V socket. At this point. it is not powerful enough for uninterrupted power supply. 6. 1. 3m long) to the laptop. make sure that the drivers for the terminal data cables. However. Attach the test terminals to their mobile holders one by one.APPE NDI X 6 379 Setting Up the System  Multi Lite first-time installation Upon your purchase of the Multi Lite case and test devices. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector. when you want to remove the cable connector from the connector panel. The dial-up installation will be performed later on. Open the case latches. 3. The following instructions will guide you through this process.

Holders 1-4 are reserved for Voice Quality measurements. 12. Instructions for how to add the device in Nemo Outdoor is included in the dial-up instructions. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. N97. Connect the chargers to the test terminals. 9. the voice quality cable for terminal 1 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 1. 6720. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements. and so forth. and follow the dial-up connection instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. See page 436 for more information. Connect the data cables to the test terminals one by one.380 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   Note that with Nokia N85. Start Nemo Outdoor on the PC. The layout of the mobile holder configuration is as shown in the image below. Note also that some terminals are charged via a USB port. N85US. Note that the same terminal type can use the same dial-up connection with Nemo Outdoor.  10. . it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. N96US. 11. after initial connection to a USB port. and 6720US terminals. the voice quality cable for terminal 2 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 2. and the other end to the +12V power sockets in the Nemo Multi Lite connector panel. For example. N96. N97US.

otherwise it may risk overheating! 14. If a scanner is connected to one of the sockets. The scanner must at no time be connected to the +12V cigarette lighter socket. 2. In case you change your test terminals to a different model. not to the USB 2.   Note that the scanner data cable is connected to the laptop.APPE NDI X 6 381  Note that only phones can be connected to the cigarette lighter sockets in the Multi Lite panel. Disconnect the terminals from the laptop and remove the data cables from the terminals by pulling them out. Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use. Use the hex key in the Multi Lite lid organizer pouch to unscrew and remove the middle panel in the case. . connect the scanner USB cable to the laptop. There are four screws (DIN 912 hex head screws) in the middle panel. or need to change data cables or audio cables for any other reason. and one screw (DIN 912 hex head screw) on either side of the case for attaching mobile holders. the fuse risks overheating! 13. see below. Changing Data Cables 1. If you purchased a scanner.0 hub at the bottom of the Multi Lite case. See the Nemo Scanner Guide for more information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

1) 2) .382 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. lift it from the right-hand side of the case when you are facing it. After removing the screws in the middle panel. and attach it to the case lid as shown in the picture sequence below.

.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) in the upper right-hand corner. Turn the thumb screws as illustrated in the picture below to open and remove the hub clamp cover. After removing the middle panel. 5.APPE NDI X 6 383 3) 4) 4. you will see the USB 2.

11. 7. remember to install the new driver before connecting the data cable to the laptop. Insert the data cables through the round PGSD-4 openings in the middle panel. Next. They will be connected to the terminals later on after the phones are attached to the mobile holders. 8. and push the USB 2. Consult the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions.0 hub back into its original place. If you also need to change audio cables. .384 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. Move the hub in the direction shown by the red arrow and lift to remove the cover. 9. If the data cable driver is different from the one used earlier. Place and screw the hub clamp cover back into place with the thumb screws. Once the cover is removed. you can remove the USB data cables. proceed to the following section. 10. change the data cables for the new test terminals.

1 cm (18. number of scanners Max. number of terminals Max.41" ) Interior dimensions 45.7lbs) Yes* Yes Yes Yes Nemo Outdoor Multi 6 1 internal 6 Yes 60.APPE NDI X 6 385 12.9 x 32. ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III ~10. If you have not already done it.72“) Weight (Multi Lite without terminals and antennas) Carry-on luggage Back up battery (Li-ion 2500mAh) / charger Industrial USB 2.8") 55.9 x 18.8 cm (19. Start with measurements. 2.89" x 6. remove the case middle panel as instructed above.06" x 12.0 x 24. Remove the audio cables from the TerraTec sound card.3kg (22. If you are done with changing cables.4 x 51.3 x 45. back-up battery.0 hub. attach and screw the middle panel back into place. Nemo Outdoor Multi Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Max. charger.6 cm (24. 412) for more details regarding the sound card setup.0. Changing audio cables 1.78" x 15.0 class T5.3 x 9.4") ~25kg (55lbs) No Yes Yes Yes Electrical parts between Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite and Nemo Outdoor Multi are identical including USB hub. and the TerraTec sound card * Max.1 standard vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC.8 cm (21. Refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide (p.0 x 8. Digi Hubport 7C Comply: 300 019-2-5 V3. You can now proceed with measurements. Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. allowance varies depending on air lines . number of voice quality terminals Pure sine wave inverter (300W) Exterior dimensions 6 1 external 6 No 50.2 x 40 x 18.77" x 7.2 x 20. 3. PCB.7 x 17. 13.1 x 20.

e. the Nemo audio module.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6 Fire USB sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor. It is supported with the Nemo Outdoor platform.1 and P862. and TD-SCDMA technologies.386 Nemo O ut door User M a nual APPENDIX 7 . Also measurements based on the WBAMR codec are supported. and CDMA2000.0 audio system. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Maya44 sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor. and the GSM. the Nemo Audio Module (EVOQ).VOICE QUALITY GUIDE Nemo Voice Quality is an option for the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. runs in real-time on a DSP board. mobileto-mobile and fixed-to-mobile measurements. the TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound card and the Maya44 sound card it is possible to perform two types of voice quality measurements. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Nemo Audio modules (EVOQs) consists of Nemo Outdoor. WCDMA. you can connect up to 6 test terminals with Nemo Outdoor Multi. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. CDMA2000. With all options. EVOQ. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. 1-6 mobiles. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendations P. For a list of supported terminals. i. 1-6 audio modules. the TerraTec sound card. and it supports the USB 2. the TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card and with the Maya44 USB sound card. The supported technologies are GSM. If you combine the TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards.862. For a list of supported terminals. Nemo Outdoor supports voice quality measurements with three options: with the Nemo Audio Module. the Maya44 sound card. . 1-4 mobiles. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice calls as perceived by end-users. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. WCDMA. four channels. 1-4 mobiles.

APPE NDI X 7 387 In mobile-to-mobile measurements. Voice Quality mobile-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Modules Voice Quality with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card . one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end.388 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Module Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with TerraTec DMX 6 Fire Sound Card .

5 seconds of incoming audio. If the server does not detect the line drop. or after a user-defined time that can be adjusted via the Nemo Server Manager application. . The server records 1. records it for the duration of the identified sample. The measurement file on server side is closed when the line is dropped. For example. This time the server recognizes the sample. After receiving the test sample. The synchronization tone is always sent from the side which sends the audio sample. opens a measurement file. The test goes on alternating until a call drops. calculates the score (MOS UL). Nemo Outdoor sends the same sample to the server. with mobile-to-fixed-line testing synchronization tone is sent first from the mobile/ EVOQ/sound card audio module to the server. non-degraded sample to Nemo Outdoor that records it and calculates the PESQ score (MOS DL).g. after which it compares the recorded sample and chooses the best matching sample from the default samples unless sample forcing is not used on server side. e. short synchronization tone is sent. Along with the test samples.APPE NDI X 7 389 VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line When Nemo Outdoor calls a fixed line that is connected to Nemo Server. After the identification. and stores the result there. the server sends the identified. or until Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Server ends the call. when busy tone detection has not been performed. They are used for synchronization purposes and do not affect the PESQ score. it takes up to 30 seconds for the server to hang up the line automatically. the server answers the call and Nemo Outdoor/EVOQ/sound card audio module starts sending the configured test sample.

390 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Mobile-to-Mobile The same logic is used also in mobile-to-mobile testing as with mobile-to-fixed line. and the setup exemplified with a picture.0. .8 and Nemo Server 2. Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing The image below exemplifies the voice quality module and cable setup. the terminal-specific cables will be listed. NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ)  Setting Up the System This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. and later. Busy call detection wizard of Nemo Server must be done before use. PSTN lines of Nemo Server must be calibrated before use. The change and description above applies to firmware version 2.0.    Note that the synchronization algorithm has been changed for the EVOQ audio module. Refer to the Nemo Outdoor user manual for detailed instructions. In the following four parts. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software first.

-If the number of terminals exceeds two. 6680. Product Code 100244-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia terminals compatible with CA-86US v.APPE NDI X 7 391 Note that all audio cables need to be inserted with the red dot facing upwards.2 data cables including: -6230i.2 audio/ data cable (420008-00) -Ground Type: Differential Ground (425000-01) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. N75 and N80. . also 10014900 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) Nokia DKU-2/CA-86US v. 6630.

RCA Female.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ. also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. If the number of terminals exceeds two. .392 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Product Code 100245-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95 series terminals including: Nokia 95 and Nokia 95US.

RCA Female. 6120 and Nokia 6121. also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. . Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ.5mm 4-P-RCA male audio cable (420042-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) 2. If the number of terminals exceeds two.APPE NDI X 7 393 Product Code 100246-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia 3500 and 612x series terminals. Included are Nokia 3500.

5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.394 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Product Code 100247-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG LHD-200E terminal. 100249-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8100 terminal.5mm.3. .5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3. 100250-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8300 terminal.3. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm angle 100248-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8000 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. Configuration -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) 425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.3.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.5mm. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.5mm. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more. RCA Female.3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5mm.

also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.KX 206 terminal.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 100255-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 1) 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm.APPE NDI X 7 395 (426000-00) -Audio cable 3. .5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00)  Note that the WHITE RCA female connector must be connected to RED RCA male connector. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) 3) EVOQ.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.5mm. RCA Female. and that the YELLOW RCA female connector must be connected to the WHITE RCA male connector. -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2. RCA Female.3.

the light will blink red a few times before turning green when it is reconnected. Please observe the led during installation and use as it will indicate whether the Multi unit is working properly or not. If the loss is due to unplugging the unit. 2. The following section will provide information on how to connect the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device. . Switch on power in Multi holder from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer. Connect the USB cable to the Multi holder and the other end to your computer. 3. The amber light may also flash briefly during installation. Green: This light indicates that the serial ports are successfully set up and the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8) is operating normally. amber. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically. insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk with the Edgeport/8 driver file into the CD-ROM drive. Switch on the computer.  Red: This light signifies the loss of USB communication with the host.  Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device When there are two or more audio modules in use. The red will also blink during installation until the installation is complete. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC2 Multi device. There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will blink red. which may need to be reinstalled. Amber (orange): This light signifies serial port activity on the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8).396 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. Otherwise.    Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device: 1. the light indicates a problem with the (Edgeport/8) drivers. the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. or green.

start from the beginning. etc.g. . There should be eight new COM ports. Wait until the process is finished. Click Yes in the Digital Signature Not Found dialog if it appears. Windows will detect the new Edgeport/8 device.APPE NDI X 6 397 4. 5. Double-click on Ports. COM50).. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel. If not. Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab click the Device Manager button).  Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e. COM49)..g. Drivers are found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. Windows® 2000 may find many new devices. Port2 is the second new COM port (e.

Port2 is the second new COM port (e. COM50).. Insert plug A in a serial port on the MMAC unit and plug B on the connector marked COM on the audio module. 1. .. there are eight new COM ports.398 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   Connecting Voice Quality Devices .g.g. COM49). etc. Connect the trace cable between the audio module and the MMAC unit. As described in the Multi device set-up.  Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e.MMAC2 Please complete the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi installation first as the Voice Quality devices are connected to the COM port provided by the Multi mobile holder.

Insert plug A to the test terminal. Use the three-headed DKU-2 trace/audio cable to connect the test terminal and the audio module.APPE NDI X 6 399 2. and plug C to the connector marked Phone on the audio module. plug B to a free USB port on your computer/MMAC unit. .

Connect the power cable between the audio modules and the MMAC unit. In the Configuration Manager. click Add and select the device. 4. A green led should light up. The Phone Properties dialog is opened. . Start Nemo Outdoor.400 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. Insert the A plugs to the connectors marked Power on the audio modules and B plug in the front panel of the MMAC unit.

. the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number. COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port. e. 6..g. select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected.APPE NDI X 6 401 5. Go to the Device Manager. Modems tab). Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. In the VQ Device Port. COM52 in the example below. For example. Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port.

You are now ready to start the measurements. make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination.402 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. Click OK. If you have several mobiles and audio modules. The test terminal will start and initialize the audio module. Switch off alert and warning tones. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum.  . Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.  Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately.5/3. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or to second highest level with N95 and other ‘2. 8.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals).

and 6720US terminals. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. N96US. N97. after initial connection to a USB port. The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi option without the carrying case. N97US. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi.APPE NDI X 6 403  Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device When there are two or more audio modules in use. the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements.   Note that with Nokia N85. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC3 Multi device. . N96. N85US. 6720.

  Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device: 1.404 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi system with the carrying case option. There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will show green. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. Switch on power in Multi from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty. Connect the USB cable to the Multi and the other end to your computer. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. Switch on the computer. red. it means that the device is off.    Green light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the internal back-up battery power source. When the light is off. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer. as described below. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically. yellow or no light depending on the power usage of Nemo Outdoor Multi. 3. insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk into the CD-ROM drive. 2. .

For instructions on how to set up the MMAC3 system. refer to the Nemo Outdoor manual.APPE NDI X 6 405 4. However. Double-click on the Universal Serial Bus Controllers item. click on the Device Manager button). You should be able to see the Generic USB Hub item. . Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel). below you will find instructions on how to connect the voice quality devices with MMAC3 Multi unit.

406 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Connecting EVOQ audio modules with MMAC3 The voice quality system is shown below. The graph shows the system on the whole. .

APPE NDI X 6

407

The following picture shows the setup with an MMAC3 Multi unit, the voice quality plate, three voice quality (EVOQ) modules, an Edgeport, and one voice quality test mobile. Please refer to the Nemo Server manual for information on how to connect the Voice Quality system with the server.

1. The voice quality plate is attached to the MMAC3 unit with screws (see the red arrows). The black arrows above indicate the screws that go in the slots underneath the voice quality (EVOQ) box to keep it in place. 2. Insert plug A of the serial cable in a serial port in the Edgeport box, and plug B in the COM port in the voice quality (EVOQ) box. One end of the A to B data cable (C) goes to Edgeport, and the other end to the laptop computer.

408

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

24. The voice quality boxes are all connected to the back of the MMAC3 unit (D). The MMAC3 unit is connected to a power source through a power cable (E). Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual for information on how to connect the MMAC3 unit to a power source.

25. Start Nemo Outdoor. In the Configuration Manager, click Add and select the device. The Phone Properties dialog is opened.

APPE NDI X 6

409

26. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port, e.g., COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.

27. In the VQ Device Port, select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. For example, the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). Go to the Device Manager. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number, COM52 in the example below.

410

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

28. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles and audio modules, make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or level 4 with N95 and other ‘2.5/3.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals). Switch off alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. 29. Click OK. The test terminal will start and initialize the terminal used with the EVOQ module, the module needs to be modified accordingly. The terminals are either used by common ground cables or differential ground cables. The table below shows the terminal model and ground type. Terminal Nokia terminals 6230i, 6630, 6650, 6651, 6680, N75, N80 Nokia N95, Nokia 7376, 6120, 6121, 3500, 6720 LG VX8X00 series Differential Ground Yes Common Ground Jumper J9 in place No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

If the purchased voice quality system includes both differential and common ground terminals, the EVOQ modules are by default set for differential ground.

APPE NDI X 6

411

Disassembling the EVOQ Module
1. Remove the cover from EVOQ module by unscrewing the four M4*6 screws.

2. Remove the pc board from the box by unscrewing the screws shown in picture 2.0. Make sure you are ESD protected to avoid damaging the pc board.

3. Install jumper J9 in place as shown in the picture below.

412

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Assembling the EVOQ Module
Place the pc board back into the box and tighten the screws. Place the cover on top of the box and tighten the screws.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD
Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data
                    USB 2.0 audio system 1 microphone input with gain control (combo XLR / 6.3 mm jack) 48V phantom power -20 dB pad switch 1 instrument input with gain control (6.3 mm jack) 4 analogue inputs (cinch) 1 phono input (RCA cinch) with RIAA equaliser and gain control 6 analogue outputs (cinch) Stereo to 5.1 Surround Expander 1 headphone jack (6.3 mm) with separate volume controller 1 optical digital input/output (TOS Link) 1 coaxial digital input/output (cinch) 1 MIDI interface In/Out (5-pin DIN) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (input 1/2) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 105 dB (A) SNR* (input 3/4) 24 bit / 192 kHz D/A converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (outputs 1-6) WDM driver for Windows XP SP2 / Vista ASIO 2.0 support Control panel for Windows XP SP2 / Vista System Requirements o o o o o 2.0 GHz Intel or AMD CPU Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP X64 or Windows Vista or Windows Vista X64 512 MB RAM 1 free USB 2.0 port CD/DVD drive

APPE NDI X 6

413

Scope of delivery o o o o o DMX 6Fire USB Power supply USB cable 1.8m 1 Adaptor (6.3mm  3.5mm mono) 1 Adaptor (6.3mm  3.5mm stereo)

Setting up the system
This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software and the DMX 6Fire USB driver first.  Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the hardware requirements stated above; the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or AMD PCU, or more powerful.

Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP
 Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. However, power can be switched on in the sound card. 1. Before you start, ensure that your Windows XP version is up to date. Right-click the My Computer icon and choose Properties from the context menu. The System Properties dialog appears, in which you can check your current service pack version. You can also enter the System Properties dialog by going to Start | Settings | Control Panel | System. It is important for Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2 for short) or Windows Vista to be installed on your computer. If this is not the case, please contact Microsoft (www.microsoft.com) to update your system. For Windows, this is generally free of charge. 2. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card driver. Please note that this specific version of the driver needs to be used. 3. Double-click on the installation file. The installation wizard will now display its welcome message.

414

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

4. The default destination for the installation is specified in the following window. If you prefer another folder, select Browse... and choose the corresponding directory. Then, click Install.

5. You can disregard the safety warning without concern. Click Continue Anyway to continue. 6. The driver is now installed in the system, and as soon as the message below appears, you can connect the DMX 6Fire USB to your computer's USB 2.0 port using the cable provided. If Nemo Multi hardware is used, sound card can be connected also to the Multi unit. Windows XP will automatically recognize the device as new hardware and open the driver installation dialogue.

APPE NDI X 6

415

7. The Windows Found New Hardware Wizard asks what driver to use for the new hardware component. You do not have to search for the driver online. The next window asks about the driver for the DMX 6Fire USB hardware. Next, select Install the software automatically [Recommended] and confirm with Next. 8. Then, just to be safe, a new system restore point is set. Nothing to be concerned about—this is a standard precaution.

9. This concludes part 1 of the installation, so click Finish. 10. This returns you to the installation wizard, as only the drivers for the USB controller have been installed; now, the drivers that make the controller a USB audio device are installed. Here, too, select Install the software automatically to install the second batch of drivers. 11. Again, you can safely ignore the message that the software did not pass the Windows Logo test. 12. Click Finish to complete the installation of the drivers.

6120. 15. . C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206. N97.416 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 13. N95 US. Note that the volume level of the test terminals needs to be adjusted according to the table below during a voice call: Terminal Nokia 3500. C5. the DMX 6Fire USB should appear in the device manager with the following entries. N95. 6121. N97US Nokia 6720(US). N96. C676 LG VX8350. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button. Start TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Control Panel from Start | TerraTec | DMX6FireUSB. Once the drivers have been installed. N85. After installation remember to check that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls are adjusted to the minimum and the PAD switches are in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. N85 US. 14. N96 US. C5-03. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7 16.

APPE NDI X 6 417 17. 19. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E terminals the TerraTec control panel settings are different from other terminals. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals. Output settings:  Set all Output levels and Master to 0dB . 18. and with Samsung SGH-U800: -5db -> -10db) Unset all routing buttons at the bottom of the panel except set Waveplay 1/2 routing to 1/2 and Waveplay 3/4 routing to ¾ Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. Remember to also pay attention to the bottom part of the panel. From the control panel set the settings as in the screen shots below. Input settings:     Set Input ½ and Input ¾ levels to +5dB Set the Waveplay ½ and Waveplay ¾ levels to -5dB (with Datang and Leadcore: -13dB. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/WCDMA terminals.

. You do not need to select anything in the dial-up connection fields unless you are also performing data transfers. . select the Sound card channel item. You will see a list of numbered options from channel 1 onwards. You can leave the DMX control panel open or close it. Otherwise there may be breaks in the measurement files. Select the port with the bigger number as the modem port and the port with the smaller number as the trace port. 22. it should be turned off. Modems tab). select Maximum (8.g. in Nemo Outdoor add a terminal by going to Measurement | Add New Device | Phone In the Phone Properties dialog select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port.418 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 20. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options. From Miscellaneous | Asio | Asio Latency. e. Now you can start Nemo Outdoor. In this case please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further information. 21.0ms 384 samples) and close the Asio Latency window. COM100 as trace port and COM101 as modem port. With the Lenovo T61 laptop you can turn this system off by going to Start | ThinkVantage Productivity Center and selecting Security | Protection and Recovery | Protect my hard-drive [ ] Enable Active Protection System. Next. Select the channel based on to which LINE IN and LINE out jack you connected the audio cable in the sound card.  Note that if there is a system that measures acceleration in the laptop and which causes the hard disk to stop when jolted. Next.

  Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. it is possible that it causes a temporary supply voltage disconnection. make sure that you select the correct channel for each mobile.APPE NDI X 6 419 23. This further risks an interruption in the reception of MOS values. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual in Appendix 5 for information on the Nemo Outdoor Multi system. Note that when you are using a separate 300W inverter. If you have several mobiles. Click OK in the Measurement Properties dialog. Note that if you are using more than two mobiles for voice quality measurements. 24. if the computer is connected to the inverter during a measurement. Nemo Outdoor Multi is needed. it is recommended that the computer and sound card be connected to the inverter prior to starting measurements. For example.  . Select Measurement Properties | Voice number | Properties. You are now ready to perform voice quality measurements. Refer to page 103 for more information on voice quality settings.

If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously. ELFA 69-715-27 (499048-02) -Inverter Mascot 9984 12V/ 220V 150W for sound card.0 sound card with required accessories including: -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results. Next.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements.0 sound card -USB A to B data cable -220V power supply -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB driver (427001-00) -Inverter Mascot 2285 12V/ 220V 300W for sound card and computer. TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2. an Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. With Nemo Multi Lite use code 100318-00 Configuration 1) 1 x Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. if you have many applications running on the laptop. try the following. try closing the unnecessary ones. First. First of all.5mm ELFA 80-361-47 (499048-04) -Terratec Cover 1180-p-030 (42700101) -Terratec Strain Relief 1180-p031(427001-02) -Line Mic4 adapter (427000-01)  .0 Sound Card    Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one USB sound card can be connected to the computer at a time Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements.0 sound card  NOTE! Use this code only when voice quality system is sold with Nemo Outdoor Multi (100149-00 or 10024300) or without multi hardware.0 Sound Card Product Code 100256-01 Product Name Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.420 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2. disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. ELFA 69-717-09 (499048-05) -PWR Cable for Inverter (4m) (499048-03) -Extension cord for sound card ELFA 42-223-76 (419009-00) -Flat head screw driver 3.

 At the back of the TerraTec Sound Card:    The power cable is connected to the POWER connector and the other end of the power cable is connected to the inverter. N95US. N97(US) Product Code 100257-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95. The A to B USB cable is connected to the USB connector.  The red RCA lead is connected to LINE IN 1 and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT 1. Note that the A to B USB cable should be connected directly to the laptop! Do not connect the cable to the multi hardware (if used). It is not recommended that other devices be connected to it to ensure sufficient power supply. The Mascot 9984 inverter is only meant to be used with the sound card. the sound card should only be used with the two power inverters provided by Anite Finland. the terminals always take up the same number in both LINE IN and LINE OUT. N96 and N96US Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) . and the PAD switches need to be in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. Note that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls need to be adjusted to the minimum. Nokia N85(US)/N95(US)/N96(US)/6720(US). and the other end of the cable is connected directly to the laptop. The Mascot 2285 inverter is meant to be used with the sound card and the laptop. When there are more than one test terminal in use. In case of overload the user risks receiving erroneous measurement results.APPE NDI X 6 421  Note that when used in a vehicle.

N97US. The red RCA lead will be connected to LINE IN X and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT X connector. N97. 6720 and 6720US. N85US. Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male. .422 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2) Audio cable CA-75U included in the terminal sales package. 100257-03 Voice Quality with Nokia N85. Note that the red audio cable (CA-75U) connector will remain unused.female) (42004600) 2) 1 x audio cable CA-75U (420047-00) The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter (1) and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead.

The red audio cable connector will remain unused. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable Line In connector in the sound card.5mm 4. . and the yellow audio connector to the line mic adapter.APPE NDI X 6 423 You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector. Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) 2) 1 x 2.pin.  Note that the volume on the Nokia N85/N95/N96/6720/N97 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call. 6121 and Nokia 3500. as shown below.RCA male audio cable (420042-00) 3) RCA male audio cable (420042-00) The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead.Nokia 6120. Nokia 3500 and 612X Product Code 100258-01 Product Name N612x/3500 audio cables/ adapter package.

424 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. and the yellow audio connector to the Line mic adapter.  Note that the volume on the Nokia 612X and 3500 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card. as shown below. .

Note that the volume on the LG VX8350 and VX8360 terminals needs to be adjusted to the maximum (8/8) during a voice call. Configuration     Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2. LG KX206. . Note that the volume on LG C676 and KX206 needs to be adjusted to level 4 (4/7) during a voice call. LG VX8350/VX8360 and Huawei C7600.5mm3. The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card. LG C676. Note that the volume on the Huawei C7600 terminal needs to be adjusted to maximum level (7/7) during a voice call.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) Note that the volume on LG C680 needs to be adjusted to level 3 (3/8) during a voice call.APPE NDI X 6 425 LG CDMA/VX8350/VX8360/Huawei C7600 (EVDO) Product Code 100259-01 Product Name CDMA audio cable/adapter package for LG C680. and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter (colors visible on the inside of the connectors).5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. LG KX256.

Below you see examples for both the TerraTec and Maya sound cards. and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter which is connected to the sound card LINE OUT/ANALOG OUT connector(s) (colors visible on the inside of the connectors). .5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm3. Configuration Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN/ANALOG IN connector in the sound card.426 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore LC 8130E Product Code 100260-01 Product Name Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore 8130E audio cable/adapter package.

APPE NDI X 6 427 You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the sound card. .

. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals the Terratec control panel settings are different from other terminals.428 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/ WCDMA terminals. unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel.

APPE NDI X 6 429 Samsung SGH-U800 Product Code 100259-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Samsung audio cable/adapter package for the following Samsung models: SGH-U800 Configuration  Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm AAET554CBEBSTD (419004-01) Note that the volume on the Samsung SGH-U800 terminal needs to be adjusted to 3 / 7 during a voice call. The white (see inside the connector) audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the red audio connector to the red RCA lead. .5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00) 3) Samsung S20-Pin Multi-Adapter 2. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector.5mm3.

N96US. .430 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. N85US. N85. after initial connection to a USB port. C5-03. and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter. N96. as shown below. N97.  Note that with Nokia C5. N97US. 6720 and 6720US terminals. C7-00. TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card and with Nemo Outdoor Multi. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. In this case the red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card.

try the following. Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one Maya44 USB sound card can be connected to a computer at a time. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used.0 GHz or AMD PCU. it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. an Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the following hardware requirements: the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.   NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications                4 input channels and 4 output channels with RCA connectors -10dBV input / output level (unbalanced) optical S/PDIF digital output with Miniplug connector headphone output (1/8" connector) with 60mW amplifier ASIO 2. or more powerful. Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements. if you have many applications running on the laptop. . it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. First. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously. sound cards from other manufacturers can be connected simultaneously to the same laptop with Maya44. try closing the unnecessary ones. place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. XP and Vista compatible with all major DJ software applications compatible with all major professional audio applications compact. However. Next.APPE NDI X 6 431  Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements.0 and CoreAudio support (4 inputs / 4 outputs) MME / WDM support (2 inputs / 2 outputs) standard USB connection to PC compatible with Windows 2000. First of all. disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. portable and lightweight design Note that for voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results.

432 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Maya44 sound card components .

8. 9. However. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\Maya44 USB driver. 6. The installation wizard may prompt you to remove and reconnect the sound card.exe to start the installation. Click Exit in the Installation finished dialog. Double-click on Setup. In such a case. A dialog appears suggesting you connect the Maya sound card to a USB slot in your PC. 4. 2. Click on Install the driver. Select I accept the agreement in the License Agreement dialog. 7. and click OK. 5. 1. 3. and click on Install. Choose the language of your preference.APPE NDI X 6 433 Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver  Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. . do as instructed. power can be switched on in the sound card. Windows should automatically detect the Maya44 sound card.

434 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 10. respectively.8.8. video and game controllers.7 items should appear under Sound. . The driver installation is now finished. The AudioDevice on USB Bus 2. and Universal Serial Bus controllers. Once the drivers have been installed. 11.7 and Maya 44 2. go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button.

the following dialog appears. If the device is connected.APPE NDI X 6 435 12. Next. If the device is not connected. Configure the settings as in the image below. The line mic adapter goes to Analog Out. The numbering in Analog Out and Analog in should be the same for each terminal. And below the Input and Output settings clarified. terminal 1 will take up Analog Out 1 and Analog In 1 connectors. 13. 15. go to the installation folder and click on Maya44Panel. the following control panel dialog appears. 16. Next. and the White cable to Analog in. . For example. connect your test terminals to Maya sound card.exe. From the picture below you will see the right configuration. 14.

 Note that with Nokia C5. N97. MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the Maya44 and TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound cards. and with Nemo Outdoor Multi or Nemo Multi Lite. . and 6720US terminals. C7-00. N85. N85US. after initial connection to a USB port. Set the Monitor In 1+2 and 3+4 to mute.436 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 17. N96. and the Output slide control all the way up as in the image. Hence. Up to 6 test terminals can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi with this configuration. 6720. C5-03. set the Input settings slide control to between 7 and 8. N97US. N96US. 18. the terminal will always have the same COM ports.

The TerraTec sound card is located at the bottom of the Multi Lite casing. Note that a Quad-core computer must be used with voice quality measurements if the number of VQ terminals is more than four. During transportation it can be placed in the pouch at the bottom of the case lid.APPE NDI X 6 437  Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements.   . The Maya44 sound card can be placed on the middle panel as shown in the image above. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used. four VQ terminals are connected to TerraTec and two VQ terminals to the Maya44 sound card. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. When using Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards.

Test sample requirements:       8kHz sampling rate 16-bit linear PCM signal scaled to 90% of full scale band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 250Hz and 3500Hz minimum duration of each sample: 2 seconds maximum duration of each sample: o o EVOQ module: 6 seconds TerraTec sound card: 10 seconds Server-side limitations that do not affect mobile-to-mobile testing are:   maximum of nine samples total in server test-sample folder the first 1. as it may impair sample flow from the terminal. Switch off the alert and warning tones. please read the requirements below. Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below:  . You will receive some default test samples along with Nemo Outdoor but if you wish to use your own samples.5 seconds have to be different in each sample Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements  Making mobile-to-mobile voice quality measurements: 1.   Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 32).438 Nemo O ut door User M a nual MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS After software installations and hardware setup you are ready to start the measurements. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4 or to the second highest level with N95.

N96 US. i.APPE NDI X 6 439 Terminal Nokia 3500. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7 2. C676 LG VX8350. N85. Script dialog for the first mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). C5. N95. the mobile that you are calling from. 4. N85 US. C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206. . 6120. C5-03. Click on the Script Editor button to create a new script. N97US Nokia 6720(US). 3. N96. In the Script Editor. N97.e. Define the voice quality settings for the first mobile.. click Add and select Voice Call from the menu. 6121. Open the Measurement Properties. N95 US.

Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. i.. Click OK. Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.e. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:     Define the phone number of the second mobile.440 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5. the mobile that you are calling. . Select the Voice quality option.

7.. Open the Measurement Properties dialog for the second mobile (Measurement | <device> | Measurement Properties). . i. Define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter. the mobile that you are calling to. 9. double-click on the End a voice call item to define whether end command type is normal or forced.APPE NDI X 6 441 6. In the Script Editor dialog.e. Finally click Close. Click Save and type a file name for the script. 8. Define the voice quality settings for the second mobile.

.442 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 10. In the Measurement Properties. click the Properties button next to the Voice Number field. Configuration dialog.

Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:      Define the phone number of the first mobile.. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Select the same file as for the other mobile. Select Data | Line Graph | New. the mobile that you are receiving calls from. Select the audio parameters. Click OK. Select the Voice quality option Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. . 12. and drag them in the graph window. i. An empty line graph window opens. 13.APPE NDI X 6 443 11. The prefix will be added at the beginning of the file name of all received files. Define a Prefix for the received files. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.e.

Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 32).444 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 14. . Click the Start Recording button. Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements  Please complete the Nemo server installation before continuing. Switch off the alert and warning tones. See Appendix 1 for detailed instructions. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score.  Making mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements: 1. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement.   Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. as it may impair sample flow from the terminal.

the voice quality measurement is run. N97US Nokia 6720(US). If you are performing measurements manually. N95. Set the time between calls parameter to one minute.APPE NDI X 6 445  Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below: Terminal Nokia 3500. . N95 US. Make sure that the server has the same samples in its reference sample folder (see Nemo Server installation guide for details). click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. 6120. N96. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2. N97. 5. With each voice call. N85 US. C676 LG VX8350. C5. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. N96 US. N85. select Start Voice Call from the Measurement menu or by clicking the Device Commands button. 6121. 4. If you are using scripts. C5-03. Define the voice quality settings for the mobile. 3. C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206. Define the voice quality settings in the Voice Call Properties dialog:   Select one of the default test samples.

In the Script Editor. Script dialog for the mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). click Add and select Voice Call from the menu. 7. Click the Script Editor button to create a new script. 6.446 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   Open the Measurement Properties. In the Voice Call Properties dialog: .

Select the Voice Quality option. . In the Script Editor dialog. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field.. define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter. Click OK.APPE NDI X 6 447    Define the phone number of the fixed end. Please make sure that the same reference file exists also on the server. 8. the server that is answering the calls and sending back the samples. i.e.

An empty line graph window opens. Select Data | Line Graph | New. 10. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. and drag them in the graph window. Finally click Close. 11. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.448 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 9. . Select the audio parameters. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Click Save and type a file name for the script.

. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. Click the Start Recording button.APPE NDI X 6 449 12.

If the data transfer still does not work properly. server or transmission problems. Low Data Throughputs In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications. Antivirus Filtering Disable the antivirus application and Windows firewall. read this document for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. This can be done via User Account Control Settings. 2.TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings If UAC (User Account Control) is set to always notify. 3. it might cause issues with data testing. it is highly recommended that Nemo Outdoor is started with administration rights by right-clicking the Nemo Outdoor icon and by selecting “Run as administrator”. It is recommended that the UAC settings are changed to “Never notify”. the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. For example. please do the following: 1. Go to Connection Properties and check that antivirus NDIS filtering is unchecked. Go to Network Settings and choose the appropriate connection assigned for the device. A PS connection can be established but data transfers cannot be made. Activate PS connection (activate PDP context). Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity. .450 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 9 . In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications. low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. If UAC settings cannot be changed.

. Check the . Try another FTP server for comparison. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. typically 10-20%. only the trace port should be defined. Does not work manually.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. For better results. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell. average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0. keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. For Nemo Outdoor 5.APPE NDI X 9 451 In LTE networks. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation. in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. For Nemo Outdoor 5. Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. a script file with data connection commands can be used. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. As ports are left blank it is not possible to perform a manual PDP context activation or data transfer via Nemo Outdoor.pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. When configuring a device with Nemo Outdoor. The modem port and dial-up connection must be left blank. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.    All Windows Versions  How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: 1. However. Command prompt FTP throughput. script is always needed. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. Start a data transfer and observe the application data throughput value. Other things that could help troubleshooting:    Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. PRB affects throughput directly. not Attach/detach or PDP context activation or deactivation commands. observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). Make the same test again but this time make a connection using Nemo Outdoor. Make a comparison test between Nemo Outdoor and the connection manager used with the device. Also try different servers. Works also manually. a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). Script files should include only data transfer commands.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases.

): 1. etc. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0: 3.452 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Using Nemo Outdoor: 1. Windows XP Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.  TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists.   . They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB. Window shows the current value. However. help desk. In most cases. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed.nmf) does not save window size info. If the registry value is missing. if the same registry value that XP uses is set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Window size not set. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor. Look at the Tcp tree. Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. Set to default. the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software.  Using debug logs (for developers. This registry entry can be removed. Windows Vista/Windows7 Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. A measurement file (. TCP Auto-Tuning detected.  2.

Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.  6. However. 7.40 and newer checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled. Right-click and select Run as administrator. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. 2. type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.APPE NDI X 9 453 If the TCP auto-tuning is disabled Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”  3. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations: .  How to check TCP auto-tuning state: 1.  Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings. Outdoor 5.  5. 4.  Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

highlyrestricted: Recommended. restricted: Recommended.microsoft. it can degrade performance in common scenarios. very conservatively. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.454 Nemo O ut door User M a nual      disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended. 8. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value.com/kb/943198) is needed when using HSDPA category 6 or higher data transfer speeds with Nokia test terminals. . normal: Default value. Windows XP fix KB943198 (http://support. Limits to 64 KB (65535). Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. only intended for research purposes).

. you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product. adapt or otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite Finland Ltd's prior written consent. 2. SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties. or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary code form only over an internal network. If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA. In such event. However. This EULA grants you the following rights: Software. emulation. copying or otherwise using the Software Product. and any "online" or electronic documentation. Storage/Network/Single Use. Limitations on Modifications. any printed materials. By installing. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.APPE NDI X 10 455 APPENDIX 10 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT . you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. Decompilation and Disassembly. The Software Product includes computer software. Adaptations and Other Changes. Separation of Components. 1. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Limitations on Reverse Engineering. Removal.READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland Ltd for the Anite Finland Ltd software product(s). A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. and distribute the Software Product to your other computers over an internal network. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as designated above. You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may not modify. The Software Product is licensed. GRANT OF LICENSE. Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. identified above ("Software Product" or "Software"). You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware"). not sold. the associated media. and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase. you may not use or copy the Software Product. Nothing in this license statement permits you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats. in whatever form.

the accompanying printed materials.456 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Not for Resale. 4. Without prejudice to any other rights. For detailed license information. please refer to http://www. video.opticom. Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its business purpose. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Erlangen. see libresample-license.pesq.com Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is protected by copyright and by European. code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product. You may terminate this EULA at any time. incorporated into the Software Product). including but not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation. are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity. modify or alter any Anite Finland Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product. gpl-license. http://www. 3. and any copies of the Software Product. Duration and Termination. -Ing. 2004.txt and lgpl-license.txt. You may not rent. audio. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. US. M. This Software Product is “Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as specified below.winwap. Software Transfer. you must destroy all copies of the Software Product and all associated media.txt located in the Nemo Outdoor installation directory. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not remove. animations. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package or download and continues until termination. Copyright Slob-Trot Software Oy Ab 2004. and other patents and is provided under license from OPTICOM Dipl. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Finland Ltd as part of the Support Services. Portions based on WinWAP technology. For further information. in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices. text and "applets". Germany. This software uses Libresample library distributed under LGPL license. The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved. music. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd which such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Keyhl GmbH.org. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including but not limited to any images.de. including for product updates and development. photographs. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software Product. http://www. printed materials. . updates and component parts and verify to Anite Finland Ltd in writing that such has been done. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services related to the Software Product ("Support Services"). Rental. In either event. Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA. in the Anite Finland Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes. Iperf copyright Copyright (c) 1999-2006.

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to another user. ARISING FROM. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. copy. but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person under the same or similar circumstances. 6. merge. WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. free of charge. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice. and/or sell copies of the Software. except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product.uiuc. subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. rent. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Finland Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like data and information. TORT OR OTHERWISE. INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS". DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY. Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive.ncsa. modify. OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. You may not loan. publish. this list of conditions and the following disclaimers. you may use only that one medium that is appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. NCSA. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM. and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so. distribute. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. 5. You may not use or install the other medium on any system. . Neither the names of the University of Illinois. to deal in the Software without restriction.edu Permission is hereby granted. this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the Software Product. to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software").APPE NDI X 10 457 Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www. including without limitation the rights to use. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium. sublicense.

the above limitation may not apply to you. fitness for a particular purpose. whether based on contract law. Use. misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including. duplication. incidental. even if these limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence. either (a) return of the price paid. The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months from the date of receipt. as applicable.S. special. at Anite Finland Ltd option. abuse. or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252. with regard to the Software Product. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software Product. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software . GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every kind. so the above limitation may not apply to you. U. or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. consequential. in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation. fault or other conduct. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. The Software Product and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights. 8. and any accompanying hardware. they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Anite Finland Ltd disclaims all other warranties. either express or implied. but not limited to Acts of God. loss of business profits. business interruption. the accompanying written materials. as applicable. CUSTOMER REMEDIES.Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. 10. whichever is longer. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be.458 Nemo O ut door User M a nual 7. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable. 9. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying the Software Product. loss of business information. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and. You may have others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. 11. In any case. and non-infringement of third-party rights. Anite Finland Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records. third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively. and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty. tort law or otherwise. punitive or indirect damages for personal injury. acts of nature or acts of war. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages. .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful